MARINE Switches, Circuit Protection & ELCI/GFCIs CATALOG • Rocker • Toggle • Pushbutton • Rotary CIRCUIT PROTECTION • Hydraulic-Magnetic • Thermal • GFCI / ELCI CUSTOM SOLUTIONS • PDU’s • Keypads • Control Modules STRATEGIC MARKETS SERVED: On/Off Highway Marine Telecom/Datacom Military Renewable Energy GLOBAL LOCATIONS: ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO14001:2004 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO14001:2004 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO14001:2004 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGES + Vertical Integration Reliable & On-Time Delivery Excellent Customer Service MULTIPLEXED POWER SYSTEMS • HMI Devices & I/O Modules • Programmable Displays • Data Communication Interfaces • Electrical Systems Monitoring ..................................................................................................................... SWITCHES & CONTROLS ................... Since its founding, Carling Technologies has continually forged a tradition of leadership in quality and product innovation. ................... 1920 There are few products that Carling Technologies hasn’t turned “ON” and fewer industries that haven’t turned to Carling for solutions. With ISO and TS registered manufacturing facilities and technical sales offices worldwide, Carling ranks among the world’s largest manufacturers of circuit breakers, switches, power distribution units, digital switching systems and electronic controls. ................... FOUNDED IN Innovative & Eco-Friendly Products OTHER SERVED INDUSTRIES: Medical Industrial Control Audio / Visual Commercial Food HVAC Floor Care Generators Small Appliances Security Systems Test & Measurment WORLDWIDE NUMBERS: 2200+ 150+ EMPLOYEES ENGINEERS 70 + 50+ DISTRIBUTORS REP FIRMS Marine Switches, Circuit Breakers & ELCI/GFCIs With years of design and manufacturing experience, Carling Technologies is the market leader in marine application switches, circuit breakers and ELCIs. From small boats to luxury yachts, OEM design engineers trust our products not only for their style but also for their performance. Carling’s switches are widely used and the most recognizable switch brand in the industry with unmatched quality and aesthetics. Its circuit breakers and ELCIs are guaranteed to perform under extreme marine environments while keeping boats and boaters safe from electrical currents. By drawing upon over 90 years of design experience, Carling Technologies is also able to provide custom product solutions that are sure to meet the most stringent design requirements. Within This Catalog, you will find Table of Contents page Product Selector Guide.......................................................2 Switches & Controls V-Series - Sealed Switch.................................................... 5 V-Series - Rotary Switch................................................... 24 V-Charger - Sealed Control .............................................. 31 W-Series - Submersible Switch....................................... 38 Standard Legend Imprinting........................................... 177 LT-Series - Toggle Switch................................................. 43 F-Series - Toggle Switch................................................... 45 G-Series - Toggle Switch.................................................. 47 P27-Series - Pushbutton Switch..................................... 49 Circuit Breakers M-Series.............................................................................. 51 A-Series............................................................................... 68 B-Series............................................................................... 94 C-Series............................................................................. 111 E-Series............................................................................. 132 Time Delay Values............................................................ 141 comprehensive product information for each product series including applications, specifications and ordering schemes. Thermal CMB-Series....................................................................... 147 CLB-Series ........................................................................ 149 CMBA/CLBA-Series ........................................................ 151 Available Online are tools such as part configurator, product selectors and stock checks. Please visit www.carlingtech.com for the latest information on all our products. ELCIs/GFCIs PB-Series........................................................................... 153 PC-Series.......................................................................... 162 Application Solution Engineers are readily available to assist you in selecting the appropriate product for your application. For further assistance, please email us at [email protected] Custom Design Solutions are available for OEMs that require specific product design and performance. Other Circuit Protection Products such as thermal protection and ground fault circuit protection are also available. Please refer to www.carlingtech.com for a complete list of product offering. www.carlingtech.com 1 Product Selector Guide ROCKERS NEW V-Series NEW V-Series Rotary V-Charger W-Series Poles 1, 2 1, 2 1 1, 2 Ratings up to 15A 24VDC 15A 125VAC 10A 250VAC up to 15A 24VDC 20A 12VDC 12V/24V DC up to 10A 24VDC Actuator rocker, paddle, locking rocker ergonomic knob sealed spring-loaded access doors bezel-less rocker, paddle & locking rocker Mounting Hole Specifications .830” x 1.450” [21.08mm x 36.83mm] snap-in mount .830” x 1.450” [21.08mm x 36.83mm] snap-in mount .830” x 1.450” [21.08mm x 36.83mm] snap-in mount .830” x 1.450” [21.08mm x 36.83mm] snap-in mount Termination .250 tabs solder lug wire leads solder lugs .250 tabs wire leads .250 tabs .110 tabs Sealing IP66 above panel IP67 above panel IP64 above panel IP68 above and below panel, fully submersible Illumination incandescent, LED, neon incandescent, LED LED LED Approvals UL, CSA, VDE pending n/a n/a TOGGLES LT-Series PUSHBUTTON F-Series G-Series P27-Series Poles 1, 2 1 1, 2 1 Ratings up to 15A 125VAC 10A 250VAC 15A 12-28VDC up to 20A 125VAC 20A 277VAC 2 HP 250VAC up to 20A 125VAC 20A 277VAC 2 HP 250VAC up to 6A 125VAC 3A 277VAC Actuator paddle, toggle (bat) paddle, toggle (bat) paddle, toggle (bat) nylon concave pushbutton Mounting Hole Specifications .500” dia [12.7mm] bushing mount .500” dia [12.7mm] bushing mount .500” dia [12.7mm] bushing mount .500” dia [12.7mm] bushing mount Termination .187 tabs solder lug .250 tabs screw terms wire leads PC terms .187 tabs solder lug .250 tabs screw terms wire leads PC terms .187 tabs solder lug .250 tabs screw terms wire leads PC terms .250 tabs solder lug wire leads Sealing standard bushing o-ring optional bushing o-ring optional bushing o-ring n/a Illumination incandescent, neon n/a n/a n/a Approvals n/a UL, CSA, VDE UL, CSA, VDE UL CSA *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. 2 www.carlingtech.com Product Selector Guide HYDRAULIC-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT PROTECTION M-Series Number of Poles Actuator Style A-Series E-Series 1-6 sealed metal toggle handle rocker paddle handle rocker sealed metal toggle handle rocker handle AC, DC, AC/DC: instantaneous, ultra-short, short, medium & long AC, DC: high inrushshort, medium & long AC, DC, AC/DC: instantaneous, ultra-short, short, medium & long AC, DC: high inrush-short, medium & long AC, DC, AC/DC: instant, ultrashort, short, medium & long AC, DC: high inrush-short, medium & long AC, DC, AC/DC: instant, short, medium & long AC, DC, AC/DC: high inrush-short, medium & long 0.02-30A@277VAC, 80VDC 02-30A@125/250VAC, 65VDC UL Listed: 0.02-250A@80VDC 0.1-100A@125VDC 0.02-70A@120VAC 0.02-20A@240VAC UL Recognized: 0.02-30A@480WYE/277VAC 2 Pole, 1Ø; 3 Pole, 3Ø 0.02-50A@277VAC 0.02-100A@250VAC, 80VDC 0.02-100A@120V/ 240VAC, 65VDC solid color: angled rocker, paddle, baton, push-toreset pushbutton, push-pull pushbutton two color: visi-rocker illuminated: angled rocker, flat rocker Available Delays AC/DC: instantaneous, short, medium, hi-inrush Max Current & Voltage Ratings 1 Pole: 0.02-15FLA@ 32VDC,125VAC 15.1-25GPA@32VDC,125VAC 0.02-12FLA@250VAC 0.02-7.5GPA@50VDC 0.02-30GPA@65VDC, 80VDC 2 Pole: 0.02-15FLA@65VDC, 250VAC 15.1-25GPA@65VDC, 250VAC Parallel Pole: 31-50GPA@80VDC Max Interrupting Capacity C-Series 1-6 1-2 1 Pole: 1,000A@32VDC 1,000A@125VAC 2 Pole: 1,000A@65VDC 1,000A@250VAC Parallel Pole: 600A@80VDC B-Series 1-6 (handle) 1-3 (rocker & metal toggle) 1-6 (handle) 1-3 (rocker & metal toggle) 0.02-30A@277VAC, 80VDC 31.0-50A@125/250VAC, 65VDC 7500A@80VDC, UL only 3000A@120/250VAC, UL only 5000A@277VAC, with fuse backup 7500A@80 VDC, UL only 3000A@125/250VAC, UL only 5000A@277VAC, with fuse backup UL Listed 50000A@80VDC 10000A@125VDC & 240VAC-5KA 5000A@480WYE/277VAC 10000A@600VAC, listed construction UL Recognized 5000A@125VDC 5000A@600VAC, without fuse backup with fuse backup Auxiliary Switch Rating 7A@250VAC 0.1A@125VAC (gold contacts) 7A (res.)@28VDC 4A (ind.)@28VDC 0.25A@80VDC contacts) contacts) 10.1A@250VAC 0.1A@125VAC (gold contacts) 0.5A@80VDC 10.1A@250VAC 1.0A@65VDC 0.1A@80VDC Available Circuits series and switch only parallel pole series, shunt, relay, switch only, series with remote shutdown, relay & shunt trip dual coil series, shunt, relay, switch only, series with remote shutdown, relay & shunt trip dual coil, mid-trip with alarm switch series, shunt, relay, switch only, series with remote shutdown, relay & shunt trip dual coil, mid-trip with alarm switch series, shunt,relay, switch only, series with remote shutdown Terminal Options .250” QC tabs, 8-32 screw with upturned lugs, 8-32, 10-32 screw (bus type), push in stud terminals .250” QC tabs 8-32 & 10-32 screw (& metric), PCB .250” QC tabs, 8-32 & 1032 screw (& metric), PCB 10-32 stud, 1/4-20 stud, 10-32 screw with saddle clamp, 7/16 clip & push-In 10-32 stud, 1/4-20 stud, 0-32 screw, 1/4-20 screw, box wire connector Mounting Method snap-in front panel threaded bushing threaded inserts: front panel snap-in threaded inserts: front panel snap-in threaded inserts rear or front panel Agency Approvals UL recognized, CSA, VDE, TUV, UL489A listed (rocker), UL1500, UL489A UL, CSA, VDE, TUV UL, CSA, VDE, TUV (rocker), UL1500, UL489, UL489A UL, CSA, VDE, TUV, UL1500, UL489, UL489A UL, CSA, VDE, UL1500, UL489 0.5A@65VDC 0.1A@80VDC 10.1A@125VAC 0.1A@125VAC (gold UL Recognized 0.02-100A@277VAC, 160VDC, 1 pole 0.02-100A@600VAC, 2 Pole 1Ø, 3 pole 3Ø 0.02-120A@125VDC, 1 pole UL Listed: 50000A@80VDC, 1P only 10000A@120VAC 5000A@125VDC/240VAC UL Recognized: 7500A@80VDC 3000A@125/250VAC, UL only 5000A@250VAC with fuse backup 10.1A@125VAC 0.1A@125VAC (gold UL Listed 0.02-100A@240VAC, 80VDC, 125VDC 0.5A@65VDC 0.1A@80VDC *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. www.carlingtech.com 3 Product Selector Guide THERMAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION CMB-Series CLB-Series GFCI / ELCI CIRCUIT PROTECTION CLBA/CMBA-Series PB-Series PC-Series Number of Poles 1 1 1 1-3 poles, 3rd pole switched neutral 1-poles (1 circuit breaker + 1 GFCI sensor module), 120V, 2-pole (2 circuit breakers + 1 GFCI sensor module), 120/240V, or 120V with neutral break 2-pole (2 circuit breakers + 1 GFCI sensor module), 240VAC, 3-pole 120/240V with neutral break (sensor module has 2 pole width) Actuator pushbutton pushbutton n/a handle, rocker, flat rocker actuators handle, rocker, flat rocker, pushto-reset actuators Leakage Current Trip Level n/a n/a n/a 30mA & 6mA 30mA & 6mA For 30mA leakage trip: ≤ 22.2mA, shall not trip 30mA, shall trip within .10 seconds, complying with UL-1053 & ABYC E11. For 30mA leakage trip: ≤ 22.2mA, shall not trip 30mA, shall trip within .10 seconds, complying with UL-1053 & ABYC E11. For 6mA leakage trip: ≤25ms For 6mA leakage trip: ≤25ms Leakage Current Trip Time n/a n/a n/a Max Current & Voltage Ratings 3 to 20A, 125-250VAC, 32VDC 3 to 60A, 125-250VAC, 32VDC 3 to 40A, 125-250VAC, 32VDC 0.10-30A@120/240VAC 0.10-50A@120/240VAC - 240VAC Max Interrupting Capacity 2500A@32 VDC 2500A@32 VDC 2500A@32 VDC 5,000A 5,000A Available Circuits series trip manual reset series trip manual reset series trip auto reset series trip series trip Termination .250 tab .250 tab with 90° bend screw terminal screw term with 90º bend .250 tab .250 tab with 90° bend screw terminal screw term with 90º bend .250” tab, .250” tab with 90° bend .250 tab, 8-32, 10-32, M4,M5 screw with upturned lugs 8-32, 10-32, M4, M5 screw, bus type 10-32 threaded stud Mounting Method threaded bushing, front panel snap-in threaded bushing, front panel snap-in plug-in front panel front panel Approvals UL, CUL, CSA, TUV, CE, UL 1500 / ISO 8846 for ignition protection / marine UL, CUL, CSA, TUV, CE, UL 1500 / ISO 8846 for ignition protection / marine UL, CUL, TUV, UL 1500 / ISO 8846 for ignition protection / marine UL489, UL1077, UL1500 CSA Approved, UL 1053, UL 1500 *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. 4 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Introduction V-Series V-Series CONTURA SWITCHES Carling Technologies’ sealed V-Series Contura switches are well known for their cutting edge design, high quality, maximum performance and unmatched reliability. These switches are a staple in the marine and transportation industries and have passed a range of environmental, corrosion, temperature, vibration, shock and sealing tests including MIL Std 202F, MIL Std 810C, UL 1500, ISO 8846, IEC 60529 and BS 5490 among others, making them one of the most rugged and reliable switches ever manufactured. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Certified to IP66 with dual seals around lamps and rocker stem. Silver plated butt contact mechanism provides reliability up to and beyond 100K electrical cycles Greaseless construction withstands temperature extremes down to -40˚C The switch accommodates up to 10 terminals and endless illumination and circuit options. The switch connector allows the user to preload FQC terminals for ease of assembly. Numerous choices of removable rockers allow for style change without having to retest or re-qualify the switch base. www.carlingtech.com 5 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Design Features V-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES INTERCHANGEABLE ACTUATORS Panel redesign is a snap with our wide range of rocker styles. Achieve maximum design variety with minimum inventory. Simply swap rockers to create an entirely new look for your panel. OPTIONAL PANEL SEAL Prevents water/dust ingress behind panel. 6 DUAL SEAL PROTECTION Seals out water, dust, debris, and enables switch certification to IP66 for front panel components. MULTIPLE LIGHTING OPTIONS In addition to Incandescent lamps, our LED illumination is offered in a wide array of light intensities, colors, as well as dual level, tri-color, and flashing options. CLEAN CONNECTIONS Options for both eight and ten terminal base styles with AMP & Packard compatible connectors affords myriad circuit options while providing ease of assembly. BRASS ROLLER PIN Robust mechanism eliminates the need for lubricants. Enables switch to withstand -40°C to +85°C temperatures. SILVER PLATED BUTT CONTACT MECHANISM Providing 50k to 100k electrical cycles and a variety of different electrical ratings. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Actuator Options & Accessories Contura II & III Contura X Contura IV Contura XI Contura V Contura XII Contura VI (WAVE) Contura XIV Contura VII Illuminated Indicators & Accessories The Contura II & III actuators are constructed of thermoplastic polycarbonate and are offered with a hard nylon overlay or a “soft-touch” elastomer overlay. These models incorporate aesthetic designs on the top and bottom of the rocker featuring two rows of raised “bumps” on the Contura II and three “indented” lines on the Contura III. The Contura IV’s “Shape to create a Shape” actuator works with the curves, contours & advanced styling of the latest panel designs, flowing with these advanced curves & radii. This actuator style fits on the Contura flush bracket/bezel. The symmetrically curved Contura V actuator provides the perfect complement to the Contura IV’s “Shape to create a Shape” design concept. With its flush style mounting bracket, Contura V can be mounted in between two Contura IV’s, by itself, or in groups. The Contura VI WAVE sealed rocker switches, when used in a row, create an uniquely appealing “wave” design on your panel. A variety of colors and finishes are available for both rocker and wave insert. Contura VI features bar and oval lenses. Contura VII featuring gently curved corners and edges assuring compatibility with most any panel design. Intuitive feel is maximized by the use of 2 embossed circular pads located at opposite ends of the rocker. Any combination of Bar or Oval style lenses can be located in the pads providing a truly unique look, exclusive to Contura VII. www.carlingtech.com The raised bracket/bezel on the Contura X helps prevent inadvertent actuation of the rocker, as well as preventing debris from being trapped under the actuator. This curved rocker style is available with a variety of lenses and legends. The raised bracket/bezel on the Contura XI helps prevent inadvertent actuation of the rocker, as well as preventing debris from being trapped under the actuator. This convex style rocker is available with a wide variety of lenses and legends. The Contura XII version features a paddle style actuator with the raised bracket/bezel of Contura X and XI. The contoured handle design provides intuitive recognition and ease of operation and is available with all Contura X and XI lens and legend offerings. The Contura XIV represents a sleek new crossover rocker design which should appeal to Trucks, Buses and Heavy Vehicles as well as the Marine Industry. Intuitive feel is provided by recessed ridges along with a Center Groove which effectively defines the boundary between top and bottom switch functions. Alert operator of systems functions or malfunctions, are offered with removable/replaceable lamps in Contura II, II, V or X styles. Accessories include connectors, mounting panels, hole plugs, panel seals, and actuator removal tools. Refer to accessories page for full details 7 V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Contact Rating .4VA @ 24VDC (MAX) resistive 15 amps, 125VAC 10 amps, 250VAC 1/2 HP 125-250VAC 20 amps, 4-14VDC 15 amps, 15-28VDC 10A, 14VT 6A, 125VAC L Dielectric Strength 1500 Volts RMS Insulation Resistance 50 Megohms Initial Contact Resistance 10 milliohms max. @ 4VDC Life 50,000 - 100,000 cycles circuit dependent Contacts Silver alloy, silver tin-oxide, fine silver Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate 1/4” (6.3mm) Quick Connect terminations standard. Solder lug, Wire Lead Mechanical Endurance 150,000 cycles minimum circuit dependent Physical Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours Neon - rated 25,000 hours LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24VDC) Seals Internal Optional external gasket panel seal Base Polyester blend rated to 125°C with a UL flammability rating of 94V0. Contura II,III,IV,V, Hard Surface: Basic actuator VI, VII Actuator structure molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate with a hard Nylon 66 thermoplastic surface overlay. Soft Surface: Basic actuator structure molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate with an elastomer overlay. Contura X,XI,XII Actuator,VP Nylon 66 Reinforced rated to 105°C Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Contura XIV Polycarbonate lens/sub-rocker with ABS shell Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) 2 position 3 positions 18° 9° from center Mounting Specifications Agency Certifications Environmental Sealing Sealed version: IP66, this rating applies to front panel components of the actual switch only, and signifies complete protection against dust as well as powerful jets of water. Corrosion Mixed Flowing Gas (MFG) Class III 3 year accelerated exposure per ASTM B-827, B-845 Silver and gold contacts Operating Temp. -40°C to +85°C Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10-500 Hz. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre and post test contact resistance. Vibration 2 Resonance search 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA 50-2000 Hz ±10 G’s peak Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 2000 Hz 0.025 No loss of circuit during test; <10μ seconds chatter. Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30G’s. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre and post test contact resistance. Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Condition A, 96 Hrs. Sealed version only. Dust Per Mil-Std 810C, Method 510.2 Air Velocity 300 ±200 Feet/Min, Test Duration 16 Hrs. Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test Cond. A, -55°C to +85°C. Test criteria pre and post test contact resistance Moisture Resistance Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact resistance Ignition Protection All Contura switches with sealed construction meet the requirements of UL1500/ISO8846 for ignition protection, in addition to conformance with EC directive 94/25/EC for marine products. .830[21.08] Panel Thickness Range Gaskets Acceptable Panel Thickness 0 .030 to .250 (.76 to 6.35mm) TEST CUT 1.450[36.83] HOLE IN 1 .030 to .109 & .147 to .157 ACTUAL MATERIAL (.76 to 2.77mm & 3.73 to 3.98mm) Recommended: No gasket with panel SWITCH thickness of .032, .062, .093, .125,.187 or .250 MOUNTING HOLE 8 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II & III - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ONNONE OFF 2B (ON)NONE OFF 3C ONNONE (OFF) 4D ONNONE ON 5F ONNONE (ON) 6J ONOFF ON 7K ONOFF (ON) 8L (ON)OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 3 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Color 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator A, B Contura II C, D Contura III Actuator orientation above terminals: 10 LENS 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red 1 6 8 G M 2 7 C H N 3 8 D J P 4 9 E K R 5 A F L S 3,6 1,4 Blue T U V W Y Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com A R B 00 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1 AND TEXTURE 0 - No Actuator BlackGray Red White Soft Surface BGRW Hard Surface CHSY 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 Body legends not available on Soft surface actuators; White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 4 Contura II available with two square lenses. Consult factory for details. 9 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II & III Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lock 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 4D ON NONEON 6J ON OFFON 7K ON OFF(ON) 8L (ON) OFF(ON) 9N OFF NONEON SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 B C D E F M N .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 15A 24V 20A 18V 20A 12V 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) .4VA/20A 12V .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. A Z E 00 8 Bracket 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Function 0 12 Legend 13 Legend Orientation 7 LAMP Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR 1 BlackGray Red White Contura II A BGH Contura III C DEF 3,6 Actuator orientation above terminals: 1,4 10 LENS Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red Blue 3 8 D J P V Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 1 Lock Color Up Down Up & Down Center 3 Match Actuator A HR 1 Black BJ S 2 White CK T 3 Red DL V 4 Safety Orange EM W 5 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 21-28 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 4 ORIENTATION 2 AZC45-1 AZC45-2 6 LOCK Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch Wlock 45 45 ORIENTATION 3 Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Only available with 3 position circuits. Center OFF and special circuits only available with center position lock function. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 10 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura IV - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 123 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 2B (ON)NONEOFF 3C ON NONE(OFF) 4D ONNONEON 5F ON NONE(ON) 6J ONOFFON 7K ON OFF(ON) 8L (ON)OFF(ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 10 Lens 11 Color 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D P JV * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator E Contura IV, left orientation T Contura IV, left orientation, laser etched F Contura IV, right orientation R Contura IV, right orientation, laser etched Actuator orientation above terminals: 10 LENS 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red 1 6 8 G M 2 7 C H N 3 8 D J P 4 9 E K R 5 A F L S 1,4 3,6 Blue T U V W Y EF Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1,5,6 No Actuator 0 Black C White Y Nickel D Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com E P C 00 9 Actuator Gray H Pewter E Red S 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 4 E8C45-100 E3C70-200 F8C45-100 F3C70-200 ORIENTATION 2 E8C45-300 F8C45-300 ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Gloss brow is on left side of E actuator and right side of F actuator. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Laser etched rocker only available with lens code Z & actuator colors black, nickel or pewter. 6 Pewter and nickel colors only available with laser etched actuator. 11 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura V - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1 A ONNONE OFF 2 B (ON)NONE OFF 3 C ON NONE(OFF) 4 D ONNONE ON 5 F ONNONE(ON) 6 J ONOFF ON 7 K ONOFF(ON) 8 L (ON)OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Color Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator G Contura V P Contura V, laser etched 10 Lens 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens style & location: #1 / #2 ClearWhite Amber Green Red Blue 1 6 8 G M T bar 2 7 C H N U bar/bar 3 8 D J P V oval 4 9 E K R W oval/bar 5 A F L S Y oval/oval Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1,3,5 No Actuator 0 Black C White Y Nickel D 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 12 G P C 00 8 Bracket Gray H Pewter E Red S 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2,6 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 4G13L ORIENTATION 4 4G MC MA 4G MA MC 3L ORIENTATION 2 4G200 MA3MC MA1MC ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Laser Etched rocker only available with lens code Z & actuator colors black, nickel or pewter. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Nickel and Pewter colors only available with laser etched actuator. 6 Consult factory for laser etched lens callout. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura IV & V Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 B 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lock 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT 3 Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 4D ONNONE ON 6J ONOFF ON 7K ON OFF(ON) 8L (ON)OFF (ON) 9N OFFNONE ON 10 Lens 11 Function 12 Legend 13 Legend Orientation 7 LAMP Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H Actuator orientation above terminals: CONTURA V: Orientation BlackGray Red White UV WY Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 6 LOCK Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch. W low profile lock Y 6 9 Actuator 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR CONTURA IV: Orientation BlackGray Red White Left J KL M Right NPR S 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 8 Bracket high profile lock Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Only available with 3 position circuits. Center OFF and special circuits only available with center position lock function. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Located at T3-6 end of switch. 6 Contura V style only. 3,6 1,4 Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 10 LENS 5 Z - No Lens ClearWhiteAmberGreenRed Blue A B C D E F bar lens G H J K L M oval lens Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 1 Lock Color Up Down Up & DownCenter 3 Match Actuator A HR1 Black BJ S2 White CKT 3 Red DL V4 Safety Orange E M W5 Gray F GN6 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 JHAY3-100 ORIENTATION 1 JHAY3-200 JHAY3-300 ORIENTATION 2 2 Circuit 0 ORIENTATION 4 1 Series J Z E 00 P P P P P P NHAY3-100 www.carlingtech.com NHAY3-200 NHAY3-300 ORIENTATION 3 13 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura VI WAVE - Ordering Scheme V 1 D B G N T B 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ONNONE OFF 2B (ON)NONE OFF 3C ON NONE(OFF) 4D ONNONE ON 5F ONNONE(ON) 6J ONOFF ON 7K ONOFF(ON) 8L (ON)OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 3 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 10 Lens 11 Lens 12 Color 13 Insert Color 14 Actuator Lens 1 00 15 16 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 7 LAMP Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator H High Insert 10,11 LENS 4 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens Clear White AmberGreen Red – 7 C H N 3 – D J P 4 – E K R – A F L S L Low Insert Blue U Bar Lens Translucent V Bar Lens Transparent W Oval Lens Transparent Y Oval Lens Translucent Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 12 ACTUATOR COLOR C Black H Gray Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 13 INSERT COLOR B Black C Bright Chrome Plated D Satin Chrome Painted S Red Y White N Bright Nickel Plated S Satin Chrome Plated T Satin Nickel Plated W White 14 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 15 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 Orientation 1 VTHAACN-MC1MC VTHA7CN-3M100 VTHWZCB-45146 VTLSZSC-70100 Orientation 2 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 14 H A 7 C B AC 9 Actuator Orientation 4 1 Series VTLLFHC-A813H VTLDECC-001MG Orientation 3 16 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators. Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura VII - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1 A ON NONEOFF 2 B (ON)NONE OFF 3 C ON NONE(OFF) 4 D ONNONE ON 5 F ON NONE(ON) 6 J ONOFF ON 7 K ON OFF(ON) 8 L (ON)OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H ACTUATOR ORENTATION ABOVE TERMINALS 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator Z Contura VII 3,6 1,4 STANDARD 10 LENS Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens White Amber Green Red Blue Lens style & location 6 B G MT 7 C H NU 8 D J PV 9 E K RW A F L SY 1 2 3 45 ORIENTATION 3 11 ACTUATOR COLOR/THUMB PRINT COLOR 1 O N/A - No Actuator CBlack/Black HGrey/Black SRed/Black YWhite/Black ORIENTATION 4 ORIENTATION 3 ORIENTATION 1 14 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION 1 AA AA 46 46 3AA-146 ORIENTATION 2 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION 4 Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com 0 00 12 Legend ORIENTATION 2 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 11 Color ORIENTATION 4 3 Rating 10 Lens ORIENTATION 1 2 Circuit Z R C 00 9 Actuator ORIENTATION 2 1 Series 8 Bracket 3AA-246 ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators. Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 4 Legends available for lighted oval lens version only 15 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X, XI & XII - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B 6 0 1 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 123 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 2B (ON)NONEOFF 3C ON NONE(OFF) 4D ONNONEON 5F ON NONE(ON) 6J ONOFFON 7K ON OFF(ON) 8L (ON)OFF(ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 6 P Z 00 8 Bracket Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 10 Lens 11 Lens 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL (EXTERNAL FOAM GASKET) X & XI with Flush Bracket X, XI, XII with Raised Bracket # of gaskets0 1 2 0 1 Black B C D 1 4 White WY Z 2 5 Gray GH J 3 6 9 ACTUATOR No Actuator 0 Black Gray WhiteRed Contura X 1 23 4 Contura XI 6 78 9 Contura XII J K N M Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 10 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #1 TERMINALS 1,4 11 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS 3,6 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style 3 8 D J PVBar 4 9 E K RW One piece Square 5 A F L SYTwo piece Square* (With clear top protective lens) 2 7 C H NUTwo piece Square* (With smoke top protective lens) 1 6 B G MTTwo piece Square* (With white top protective lens) * All bottom lenses are molded of opaque material. Consult factory for other lens colors. Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O OFF ON O I 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 6ZZ3G-100 6FFMA-4MC MA 3G ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 2 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 9 Actuator ORIENTATION 4 1 Series 70 G3 A7 MC MA 6ZZ3G-1A7 6FFMA-3MC MC 6FZ70-100 ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red & gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 With 2 square lenses, use selection 12 for lens above lamp 1, & selection 14 for lens above lamp 2. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Not available with Contura XI rockers. 16 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 1 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lock 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 4D ON NONEON 6J ON OFFON 9N OFFNONEON SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 6 LOCK Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch. WLock Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators; Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Located over T1-4 end of switch. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Located over T3-6 end of switch. 1 P B 00 8 Bracket 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Function 12 Legend 0 13 Legend Orientation 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No Gasket1 2 3 One Gasket4 5 6 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR Contura X Black 1 Grey 2 Red 3 White 4 Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 10 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS 5 Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style 3 8 D J PV Bar 4 9 E K RWOne piece Square 5 A F L SY Two piece Square* (with clear top protective lens) 27CHN U Two piece Square* (with smoke top protective lens) 1 6 B G MT Two piece Square* (with white top protective lens) * All bottom lenses are molded of opaque material. Consult factory for other lens colors. Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 3 Lock Color Up Down Up & Down Match Actuator A HR Black BJ S White CKT Red DL V Gray E MW Safety Orange F NY 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Orientation 1 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 Orientation 4 Orientation 4 4 Orientation 2 1PM4F-1 45 4F MC Orientation 3 18K45-2 13DMC-1 www.carlingtech.com 17 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura XIV - Ordering Scheme V 1 D B B C 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 2B (ON)NONEOFF 3C ON NONE(OFF) 4D ON NONEON 5F ON NONE(ON) 6J ON OFFON 7K ON OFF(ON) 8L (ON) OFF(ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 3 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 34 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 10 Lens 11 Actuator Color 1 00 12 Legend 13 14 Legend Actuator, Orientation Lens Legends 6 & 7 LAMP No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR & PANEL SEAL Color No Gasket 1 Gasket 2 Gasket BlackB C D GrayG H J White W YZ 9 ACTUATOR STYLE 0 No Actuator - Furnished separately FA Contura XIV FB Contura XIV - Laser Etched 10 LENS COLOR / STYLE 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red 1 6 B G M 2 7 C H N 3 8 D J P 4 9 E K R 5 A F L S 5 A N/A N/A N/A Blue T U V W Y N/A PAD Printed Laser-Etched Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S NONE – – A 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) K 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) M 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) N 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) P 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) U 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) 18 FA P C AB 9 Actuator 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1 O N/A - No Actuator CBlack SRed YWhite 12 ACTUATOR LENS or BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 1 2 3 4 14 ACTUATOR / LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. www.carlingtech.com V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II, III, & IV - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] www.carlingtech.com 19 V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura V, VI & VII - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] CONTURA V CONTURA V SHOWN WITH BAR LENS SHOWN WITH LOW PROFILE LOCK 1.922 [48.56] 1.922 [48.56] 1.079 [27.40] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS .505 [12.83] .250 [6.35] X .031 [.78] .250 [6.35] X .031 [.78] SWITCH SHOWN WITH VCH CONNECTOR 8 TERMINAL 20 .960 [24.38] .960 [24.38] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 7 8 7 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 10 9 BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 8 TERMINAL BASE BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 10 TERMINAL BASE 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 0.985 [25.02] .250 [6.35] .031 [.78] .820 [20.83] .820 [20.83] .960 [24.38] 2.029 [51.53] 1.000 [25.40] .250 [6.35] X .031 [.78] .390 [9.90] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS 1.922 [48.82] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIER AND LAMP TERMINAL 1.020 [25.91] .505 [12.83] SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS AND BAR LENS 1.126 [28.60] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 1.020 [25.91] CONTURA VII SHOWN WITH OVAL LENS 1.950 [49.53] .080[2.03] 1.479 [37.57] 1.550 [39.37] CONTURA VI SWITCH SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL .820 [20.83] .960 [24.38] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS SWITCH SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL www.carlingtech.com V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X, XI, XII & XIV - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] CONTURA X SHOWN WITH RAISED BRACKET CONTURA XI CONTURA XII CONTURA XIV SHOWN WITH RAISED BRACKET AND TWO SQUARE LENSES SHOWN WITH PADDLE ACTUATOR SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS 1.928 [48.97] .350 [8.89] .667 [16.94] 1.910 [48.51] 1.910 [48.51] .426 [10.82] .350 [8.89] 1.586 [40.28] .573 [14.56] 1.305 [33.15] 1.506 [38.25] 1.370 [34.79] 1.370 [34.79] 1.370 [34.79] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS .960 [24.38] .960 [24.38] .970 [24.64] .960 [24.38] .780 [19.81] .780 [19.81] .780 [19.81] .250 [6.35] X .031[.78] .390 [9.90] .390 [9.90] .820 [20.82] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS SWITCH SHOWN WITH VCH CONNECTOR 8 TERMINAL www.carlingtech.com .390 [9.90] .820 [20.82] .820 [20.82] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS .960 [24.38] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 1 7 4 8 7 1 4 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 10 9 BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 8 TERMINAL BASE .820 [20.83] BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 10 TERMINAL BASE SWITCHES SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL 21 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - II to XIV - Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 3 1 3 2 3 5 3 3 5 3 6 2 1 3 4 2 1 2 6 3 4 2 6 4 1 1 6 5 3 3 6 5 3 2 6 5 6 G SYMBOL LEGEND SYM. 2 3 S 2 7 6 5 2 F 1 5 2 5 3 1 2 6 R 2 6 4 3 5 E 3 6 M 2 1 4 5 3 1 5 D 5 3 L 2 3 5 2 C 1 1 6 2 4 6 K 2 3 4 2 B 1 3 J 2 3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 6 A 2 CIRCUIT 2 5 DEFINITION DESIGNATES TERMINALS AND CONTACTS DESIGNATES LAMP LOCATION 1 3 3 4 DESIGNATES MAINTAINED CIRCUITS DESIGNATES OTHER POSITION 8 H DESIGNATES MOMENTARY CIRCUITS DESIGNATES TWO POSITION CONNECTION 2 22 2 5 DESIGNATES EXTERNAL JUMPER PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - II to XIV - Lamp Circuit Diagrams, Hazard Warning Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: LAMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM LAMP CIRCUIT +8 +8 A/1 1 -7 1 +3 +3 SPECIAL #1 +3 2 2 M/R +1 +3 -4 2 H/Z SPECIAL #3 +1 +3 2 J/8 2 2 1 N/T SPECIAL #4 +3 1 2 -7 +3 -8 1 +6 1 +8 -6 -7 -7 2 -7 +8 2 +6 1 +8 -6 +3 -7 C/3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM -6 1 L/9 LAMP CIRCUIT -7 1 G/7 +3 +6 1 +1 +3 -4 P/V 2 -6 1 2 -7 -7 +8 +1 +3 E/5 -6 2 +8 -7 D/4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM -7 +3 B/2 +3 1 F/6 LAMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 2 K/W +6 1 U/Y 2 (-)7 -7 +8 +10 1 2 -7 -9 Hazard Warning Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 17 18 10(-) 3 J1 1 2 5 3 14 11 13 CIRCUIT 10(-) J5 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 3 5 1 5 3 11 13 3 14 11 13 3 14 15 12 6 16 JK 1 1 5 8 J3 2 8 17 18 10(-) 3 6 JJ 1 5 3 14 NOTE: J circuits are available for all non-locking V-Series styles. Consult factory for p/ n details. JA 17 18 10(-) J2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 11 13 17 18 2 2 8 CIRCUIT 8 17 18 10(-) SYMBOL LEGEND 1 J4 SYM. DEFINITION DESIGNATES TERMINALS AND CONTACTS DESIGNATES LAMP LOCATION 2 5 www.carlingtech.com 23 V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Introduction Rotary V-Series CONTURA ROTARY SWITCHES The V-Series Contura Rotary Switch was designed for maximum performance and reliability leveraging the features of the widely popular V-series Contura Rocker Switches. Available in maintained and momentary circuit options, the V-Series Rotary features a sturdy knob construction, up to three separate LEDs, and fits in an industry standard panel opening. Internally, the V-Series Contura Rotary uses a patented mechanism that translates rotary to linear motion. This allows for common switch functionality and terminal connections with the V-Series rocker version and requires no harness change. A secondary CAM, which helps drive the mechanism, provides definitive detent positions and prevents the switch from stopping between positions, while improving tactile feel. The V-Series Rotary also features an innovative PC board that supports the LED and surface mount resistors; and IP67 sealing protection above panel by utilizing LED and actuator stem seals. Together, these features make the V-Series Contura Rotary switch the best choice available in the market today. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Accommodates up to three separate LEDs Patented mechanism translates rotary into linear motion Secondary CAM for definitive detent positions PC Board supports LED and surface mount resistors IP67 sealing protection above panel Common terminal & circuit functionality with V-Series Rocker switches, with no harness change required 24 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Design Features V-Series Rotary Switch DESIGN FEATURES OPTIONAL PANEL SEAL Prevents water/dust ingress behind panel LEDS Up to three separate LEDs www.carlingtech.com SEALS LED and stem seals provide IP67 protection above panel ROTARY & LINEAR ACTUATOR Patented mechanism that translates rotary to linear motion PC BOARD Supports LEDs and surface mount resistors TERMINALS Same pinout as V-Series Rocker Switches, requiring no harness change SECONDARY CAM Provides definitive detent positions with ball & spring located in rotary actuator 25 V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - General Specifications Electrical Mechanical Rating Circuit Voltage Max Current Resistive 2 Position Maintain 2 Position Momentary 3 Position All 2 Position Maintain 2 Position Momentary 12 12 12 24 24 20 20 20 15 15 3 Position All 24 15 Dielectric Strength 1500 Volts RMS Insulation Resistance 50 Megohms Initial Contact Resistance 10 Milli Ohm max @ 4VDC Life 50,000 Cycles Two Position 25,000 Cycles Two Position Momentary and All Three position Terminals 0.250” (6.3mm) Quick Connect Physical Function Circuits Double Pole Single Throw, DPST Double Pole Double Throw, DPDT Operation Two and Three Position Maintained and Momentary Knob Rotation Two Position 60 Degrees Three Position 30 Degrees from Center Illumination LED; Red, Green, Amber, Yellow, White, Blue Seals LED O-ring(s) – Silicone, Bezel gasket – Neoprene, Knob seal - NBR Flammability Exceeds FVMSS 302 Requirements, Exterior Components, UL 94 V-2 or Better Interior Components, UL 94 HB or Better Base Polyester, PBT Bracket Nylon 66, PA Knob Polybutylene Terephthalate, PBT 6.5%GF Lens Polycarbonate, PC Connector Nylon 66, PA Mounting Front Panel Snap In, 1.450” (36.83mm) X 0.830” (21.08mm) Panel Thickness, 0.030” – 0.187” (0.76 – 4.75mm) Mechanical Life Knob Impact Environmental Sealing Dust Corrosion Chemical Splash Salt Spray Vibration Random Vibration Sinusoidal Shock Handling Shock Thermal Shock Moisture Resistance Thermal Cycling Ignition Protection UV Protection ESD 100,000 Cycles Maintained Circuits 50,000 Cycles Momentary Circuits 50 Gram weight dropped from a height of 18 inches on Top & Sides IP67, in accordance with IEC 60529, BS 5490, DIN 40050 & NFC 20 010. This rating applies to front panel components of the actual switch only, and signifies protection against dust and the prolonged effects of immersion under pressure. Mil STD 810, Method 510.2 Air Velocity 300 Ft/Min Duration 16Hr IEC 68-2-60 Mixed Flowing Gas (MFG) 14 Days Gasoline, Diesel, Motor Oil, Brake Fluid, Ammonia, Armour All Mil STD 202G, Method 101, Test Condition A 96 Hr Mil STD 202G, Method 214 test Condition C 10G’s RMS Mil STD 202G, Method 204D, Test Condition A 0.06DA or 10G’s 10-500Hz MIL-STD 202G, Method 213B Test Condition K, 30G’s 1 Meter Drop onto Hard Surface MIL-STD 202G, Method 107G Test Condition A -55 C to 85 C MIL-STD 202G, Method 106F 10, 25 C to 65 C Cycles 95% RH 25 Cycles -40 C to 85 C ISO 8846 with EC Directive 94/25/EC for Marine Products 300 hr Xenon Arc, 1.4W/m2 wavelength 420 nm Human Static Discharge, +/- 15KV applied during normal operation Shipping/Handling, frequency range 200-2000 MHz applied voltage is +8KV to +15KV and -8KV to -15KV 3 discharge cycles *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 26 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Ordering Scheme RV 21 D 2 B 6 0 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 1 1 SERIES RV Rotary Contura 2 CIRCUIT 1 Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary from bottom of switch: 8 - - 7 DP - double pole uses 1, 2, 3 and 4, 5, 6. 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position:1 2 3 DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 21 ON NONE OFF 22 (ON) NONE OFF 23 ON NONE(OFF) 24 ON NONE ON 26 ON OFF ON 28 (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS 55 (ON) OFF ON 61 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3, 4 & 5 1 & 2, 4 & 5 62 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF 64 (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF 3 RATING 1 .4VA 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V D 20A 12V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 Term 10 Term TerminationJumper 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) - no barriers No AB .250 TAB (QC) - with barriers No 4, 5 4, 5 J K .250 TAB (QC) - no barriers Yes (T2 to T5) Notes: 1 Switch circuit uses terminals 1,2,3,4,5 & 6. Terminals 7,8,9 & 10 are for lamp circuit only. 2 Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for Circuits 61, 62, & 64 to be specified in the Termination & Jumper selection. 3 Circuit 61 may be used for SP, OFF-ON-ON circuit. 4 Base will not have terminal insulating barriers when connector and/or jumpers are used. 5 Code J,K are optional for circuits 62 and 64. Customer may provide externally wired jumper to connect terminals 2 and 5. 6 Lamp #1 located at top end of switch, above terminal 4. Lamp #2 located at top end of switch between terminals 1 & 4. Lamp #3 located at top end of switch, above terminal Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to L.E.D. lamps only. 7 Mounting hole size is 1.450” (36.83mm) by 0.830” (21.08mm). To mount multiple switches in single panel cut-out order optional interlocking mounting panels. 8 Lens color for L.E.D.s must be clear, white, or match color of L.E.D. 7 Lamp 2 8 Lamp 3 9 Bracket 5 ILLUMINATION 6, 8 Sealed Lamps S NONE A # 1 B # 1 C # 1 & # 3 D # 1 & # 3 E # 1 # 2 # 3 F # 1 # 2 # 3 G # 1 # 3 H # 2 J # 1 # 2 K # 1 # 2 L # 1 # 2 M # 2 # 3 N # 2 # 3 P # 2 # 3 R # 3 T # 3 K R C 10 Actuator 11 Lens 12 Knob Color when illuminated Terminals Independent Dependent Independent Independent Dependent Dependent Independent Independent Independent Dependent Independent Dependent Dependent Independent Independent Independent Independent Dependent Dependent Dependent Independent Independent Independent Dependent Dependent Independent Dependent Independent Dependent 8+ 3+ 8+ 10+ 3+ 1+ 8+ 9+ 10+ 3+ 9+ 1+ 3+ 8+ 8+ 8+ 10+ 3+ 1+ 3+ 8+ 8+ 10+ 3+ 1+ 10+ 1+ 8+ 1+ 77777777777777777777777777777- 6, 7, 8 LAMP #1, 2 AND OR LAMP #3 6, 8 Selection 6: above terminal 7; Selection 8: above terminal 8 No lamp 0 LED RedAmber Green Blue White 12VDC CN H E 6 24VDC DP J K 8 9 BRACKET COLOR & PANEL SEAL 7 Color No Gasket 1 Gasket 2 Gasket Black BC D Gray GH J White WY Z 10 ACTUATOR STYLE K Rotary Knob (Standard) ACTUATOR ORIENTATION ABOVE TERMINALS 4 1 11 LENS COLOR 8 No Lens Z Clear WhiteAmber Green Red Blue 4 9E KRW 12 KNOB COLOR Black GrayRed White C HS Y www.carlingtech.com 27 V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.400 [35.56] 1.700 [43.18] .845 [21.47] 1.079 [27.40] 1.550 [39.37] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/ BARRIERS .960 [24.38] 1.126 [29.24] .250 [6.35] X .031[.78] .353 [8.64] .820 [20.83] .960 [24.38] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 7 1 4 2 5 3 6 10 9 BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 10 TERMINAL BASE SWITCH SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL 1.266 [32.16] 1.318 [33.48] 28 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Circuit Diagrams Circuits Diagrams: LEGEND SYMBOL DEFINITION TERMINAL LOCATION MAINTAINED CIRCUIT MOMENTARY CIRCUIT INTERNAL CONNECTION (JUMPER TERMINAL) 2 POSITION CONNECTION 2 POSITION CONNECTION P1 P3 2 POSITION P1 P2 P3 3 POSITION www.carlingtech.com 29 V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Lamp Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: 30 www.carlingtech.com V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger– Introduction V-Charger V-Charger V-SERIES DUAL PORT USB 2.0 CHARGERS Carling Technologies USB V-Charger is designed to charge tablets, e-readers, mobile and gaming devices, digital cameras, as well as other compatible electronic devices. Providing a total current of 3.15 amps, the V-Charger delivers fast charging times even in extreme temperatures from -40˚C to +80˚C. This innovative product safeguards its electronics with integrated over-current and thermal overload protection, as well as optional load dump circuitry, assuring prolonged safe and reliable operation. The center LED indicates charging is in progress. Snap-in mounting for an industry standard 1.450” x .830” panel cutout makes installation easy. *Additionally, the V-Charger’s double torsion spring-loaded access doors automatically close and provide effortless IP64 sealing protection with precision-fit silicone rubber seals. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Dual USB Charging Ports 3.15 Amps for Faster Charging 10,000 Operating Cycles per Port IP64 Sealing Protection 12-24 V Operating Voltage Protection for Internal Components www.carlingtech.com 31 V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger V-Charger DESIGN FEATURES DUAL USB 2.0 PORTS Total current of 3.15 amps, facilitating faster charges SEALING PROTECTION Silicone rubber seal perfectly mates with door indent to provide IP64 level of sealing protection 32 SPRING LOADED DOORS Stylish, wing-shaped double doors automatically close to cover and seal each port when not in use PANEL SEAL Prevents water ingress beneath panel to protect critical connections LED Green LED brightens to indicate charging is in progress MOUNTING Fits industry standard panel opening size of 1.450” x .830” www.carlingtech.com V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - General Specifications Electrical USB Type 2.0 Number of USB Ports 2 Operating Voltage 12V/24V DC power systems (9 to 29 VDC) Output Voltage 5 VDC ± 5% Max Output Current 3.15A DC Total Current Draw (No Load) 12V: 0.8 mA, 24V: 1.9 mA LED Indicator Green LED brightens when charging is in progress. Compatibility Charges mobile devices including iPad, iPhone, iPod, HTC, Galaxy, Blackberry, MP3 Players, Digital Cameras and PDA’s Life 10,000 operating cycles per port minimum Terminals Copper/silver plating 1/4” (6.3 mm) Quick Connect terminations Reverse Polarity Operational with correct polarity after reverse polarity exposure ESD 15kV air, 8 kV touch Overcurrent Protection Short Circuit Thermal Overload Protection Operation will cease if internal temperature reaches 125°C. Charging will resume after sufficient heat loss Physical Panel Opening Panel Thickness Panel Mounting Method Seals Depth Behind Panel Connection Weight Styling Port Protection 1.450” x .830” .030 - .156 inches Front Panel Insertion Silicone and Poron See Figures 1 and 2 VC1, VC2 55g (0.12 lbs) Curved USB port doors Twin, self-closing doors Environmental Sealing IP64 for front panel components when USB Ports are covered Operating Temperature -40° to +60°C at 3.15A -40° to +70°C at 2.4A -40° to +80°C at 2.1A Vibration 1 Mil-Std 202G, Method 204D, Test Condition A. 0.06DA or 10G, 10-500 Hz Shock Mil-Std 202G, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30-G. No loss of circuit during test. Chemical Splash Brush method with USB doors closed: diesel, gasoline, brake fluid, Windex, Armor All Thermal Shock MIL-Std 202F, Method 107D, Test Condition A, -55° to +85°C. Test Criteria: Remains functional without damage Moisture Resistance Mil-Std 202G, Method 106G. Test Criteria: Remains functional without damage Thermal Cycling 25 Cycles -40° to +85°C, 2 hours for each temperature every cycle Salt Spray Mil-Std 202G, Method 101E, Test Condition A Dust Mil-Std 841C Method 510.2 Air Velocity 300 ± 200 Ft/min, test duration: 16 Hr Mechanical Endurance 10,000 door cycles minimum *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 33 V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Ordering Scheme V 1 Series USB 2 Product Type 24 3 Source Voltage G 1 1 4 LED Indicator 5 Circuit Protection 6 Termination 1 SERIES V 6 TERMINATION 1 .250 Tab 2 PRODUCT TYPE USB Charger 7 DOOR STYLE 1 Curved 3 SOURCE VOLTAGE 24 24 / 12 Volts DC 8 DOOR COLOR B Black 4 LED INDICATOR (VOLTAGE MATCHES SOURCE) G Green 9 FRAME COLOR B Black 5 CIRCUIT PROTECTION 1 Reverse Polarity, Thermal Overload & Overcurrent 10 PANEL SEAL 1 Yes 1 B B 1 7 Door Style 8 9 10 Door Color Base Color Panel Seal Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] NEGATIVE ( – ) POSITIVE ( + ) Notes: 1 Charger to install into 1.450” X 0.830” panel opening 34 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Stand-Alone Components Reduce inventory levels and cost by stocking actuators and base switches separately. Contura II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, X, XI, XII, XIV Base switches separately: specify V with code selections 2-8 in the ordering schemes. Contura II, III, IV, V Actuator only: VV with code A or C for selection 9, & with selections 10-14 in the ordering schemes. Contura VI Actuator with lenses and inserts only: VV with code selections 9-16 Contura II, III, IV, V, VII Actuator only: VV with code A, C, E, G, P or Z for selection 9 & with selections 10-14 in the ordering schemes. Contura X, XI, XII, XIV actuators with lenses separately: VV with code selections 9-14 in the ordering schemes. Panel Seal: VPS Contura X & XI actuators without lenses separately: VVR 6 1 00 1 1 Actuator Separately 2 3 Actuator Lens Style/Color Opening 4 Actuator Legend Contura XII actuators without lenses separately: VVP J 1 Z 21 1 00 5 Legend Orientation 1 Actuator 2 Style & Color 3 Lens Opening 4 Lens Opening 6 7 Legend Legend Orientation 5 Legend 1 CONTURA X & XI ACTUATOR SEPARATELY VVR 1 CONTURA XII ACTUATOR SEPARATELY VVP 2 ACTUATOR STYLE & COLOR Black Gray WhiteRed Contura X 1234 Contura XI 6789 2 ACTUATOR STYLE & COLOR JBlack K Gray N White M Red 3,4 LENS OPENING FOR Z No lens 1 Bar lens Square lens 3 LENS OPENING FOR 1 1 One bar lens 2 One bar lenses 3 One square lens 4 two square lens 5 square lens on top/ bar lens on bottom (Contura X only) 4 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 00 - No Legend this location 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O OFF ON O I 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 5 LEGEND ORIENTATION 1 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 5, 7 LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 OFF ON 2 Color posts mount toward actuator stem 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 6 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 2 ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 Contura X, XI & XII actuator lens assembly separately: ORIENTATION 4 VVL 2 1 00 0 ORIENTATION 2 1 Lens Separately top lens bottom lens } 3 Lens Color 4 Legend 5 Legend Orientation 2 LENS STYLE 3 1 Bar lens 2 One Piece Square lens 3 Bottom of Two-Piece Square lens 5 1 TOP OF LENS SEPARATELY VVT 2 COLOR 1 Clear 2 Smoke 2 Lens Style 1 CONTURA X, XI & XII LENS SEPARATELY VVL 3 White 3 TRANSLUCENT LENS COLOR 1 Clear2 White3 Amber4 Green 45 Red6 Blue 4 Contura X, XI & XII actuator lens assembly: actuator stem 24 I Contura X, XI & XII top piece of 2-piece lens separately: 1 Lens Separately 23 O ORIENTATION 3 VVT 1 2 4 LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 OFF ON two piece lens assembly 23 O 24 I 1 piece lens/bar lens are positioned the same as bottom lens for assembly, minus the top lens. Lenses snap in from bottom. Notes: 1 If actuator lens opening for 2 bar or 2 square lenses, legend orientation 0,1, or 2 must be chosen. 2 Center of actuator marking not available for Contura XII. 3 Legend is not available for bar style lens. 4 Not recommended with neon lamps. 5 Must also order top piece of 2 piece square lens separately. 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 5 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 4 ORIENTATION 2 ORIENTATION 3 www.carlingtech.com 35 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Accessories Easily integrate Contura products into your system, with Contura Accessories Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE PART NO Contura Connectors COMPANY SERIES WIRE RANGE TIN GUIDE PLAIN Q.C. SELECTION AWG PLATED BRASS PART NO BRASS COMPANY SERIES (REF) WIRE RANGE 12 02965580 ORIENTATION MM 2 3.0 ORIENTIN 02965471 (2)16-14 2GUIDE PLAIN TATION Q.C. SELECTION Q.C.12010601 SELECTION GUIDE Q.C. GUIDE MM(2)1.0-2.0 AWGSELECTION PLATED BRASS 02965470 16-14 (REF) 1.0-2.0 BRASS WIRE WIRE WIRE PART NO PART NO PART NO PACKARD 58 SERIES B RANGE .5-.8 RANGE 02965469 06288318RANGE 02965580 12 20-18 ORIEN3.0 COMPANY COMPANY ORIENTIN TIN 10 5.0 12084590 2TIN 2 SERIES PLAIN SERIES PLAIN PLAIN TATION TATION 02965471 PLATED 12010601 (2)16-14 (2)1.0-2.0 AWG MM AWG MM AWG MM 2 PLATED PLATED BRASS BRASS12052224 BRASS (REF) 12 3.0 (REF) BRASS BRASS BRASS 02965470 16-14 1.0-2.0 B (REF) COMPANY SERIES PACKARD 58 SERIES 02965580 0296558012015870 12 12 16-14 1.0-2.0 06288318 1202965580 20-18 3.0 .5-.8 3.0 PACKARD 02965469 12010601 12010601 12010601 (2)1.0-2.0 02965471 (2)16-14 (2)16-14 02965471 (2)16-14 02965471(2)1.0-2.0 12020035 (2)22-18 (2).5-.8 METRI-PACKPACKARD PACKARD PACKARD 10 5.0 12084590 Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE 02965470 02965470 16-14 02965470 1.0-2.0 16-14 B1.0-2.0 16-14 SERIES58 58630 SERIES SERIES 58 SERIES 12015869 20-18 .5-.8 12015832 12052224 12 .5-.8 02965469 06288318 02965469 20-18 06288318 02965469 20-18 062883183.0 .5-.8 20-18 WIRE PART NO 12052222 20-22 .35-.5 12015870 16-14 RANGE 1.0-2.05.0 10 5.0 10 10 12084590 12084590 12084590 PACKARD COMPANY ORIENTIN12052224 12052224 12 (2)22-18 3.012052224 12 3.0 12 2 PLAIN TATION METRI-PACK SERIES 12020035 (2).5-.8 1.3-3 AWG 16-12 MM Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE PLATED 60253-2 60253-1 BRASS 12015870 BRASS 16-14 12015870 1.0-2.0 16-14 12015870 1.0-2.0 16-14 630PACKARD SERIES AMP PACKARD PACKARD 12015832 12015869 20-18 (2) .5-.8 (2) 1.3 16 (REF) WIRE 250 SERIES METRI-PACK 12020035 (2)22-18 12020035 (2).5-.8 (2)22-18 12020035 A (2).5-.8 (2)22-18 METRI-PACK 02965580 METRI-PACK PART NO 12 3.0 12052222 20-22RANGE .35-.5 20-18 630 SERIES 630 SERIES 630 SERIES42100-2 18-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 12015869 20-18 12015869 20-18 12015869 12015832 12015832 12015832 COMPANY ORIEN12010601 (2)16-14.5-.8 (2)1.0-2.0 .5-.8 02965471 TIN PACKARD 2 .35-.5 SERIES PLAIN TATION 16-12 1.3-3 12052222 PLATED 20-22 12052222 20-22 12052222 20-22 60295-2 22-18 .3-.9 60295-1 02965470 16-14.35-.5 1.0-2.0 B AWG MM 58 SERIES 60253-1BRASS 60253-2 AMP (REF) BRASS 02965469 06288318 20-18 16-12 (2) 16-12 .5-.8 16-12 161.3-3 (2) 1.31.3-3 ORIENTATION TANG 3.0 (2)1.0-2.0 A B1.0-2.0 .5-.8 A B 5.0 TANG 3.0 1.0-2.0 A(2).5-.8B .5-.8 TANG TANG SYMBOL = TANG SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT SYMBOL TANG A TANG SYMBOL = SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT .35-.5 SYMBOL TANG SYMBOL =TANGSHOWS SYMBOL =TANG SYMBOL = ORIENTATION SHOWS OFORIENTATION TANG IN SHOWS SLOT OFORIENTATION TANG IN SLOT OF TANG IN SLOT 1.3-3 SYMBOL SYMBOL SYMBOL 60253-2 60253-2 60253-2 60253-1 60253-1 60253-1 250 SERIES AMPConsult Delphi AMP Packard AMP 12084590 NOTE: and/or Amp on actual part numbers and availability. B 02965580 12 3.0 10 5.0 (2) 16 18-14 (2) 1.3 (2) 16 .8-2(2) 1.3 (2) 16 (2) 1.3 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 42100-2 250 SERIES 250 SERIES 250 SERIES B B AMP is a registered trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, PA B TANG 12010601 (2)16-14 (2)1.0-2.0 12052224 12 3.0 42100-2 18-14 42100-2 .8-218-14 42100-2 .8-218-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 02965471 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 42100-1 Delphi Packard is 02965470 a registered trademark 22-18 of Delphi-Packard Systems Warren, Ohio PACKARD 60295-1 60295-2 .3-.9 Electrical 16-14 1.0-2.0 B 12015870 16-14 1.0-2.0 60295-1 58 SERIES PACKARD METRI-PACK 60295-2 60295-1 02965469 22-18 60295-2 22-18 60295-2 60295-1 .3-.9 06288318 12020035 20-18 (2)22-18 .3-.9 22-18 .5-.8 (2).5-.8 .3-.9 A NOTE: Delphi Packard and/or Amp on actual part numbers and availability. .820[20.83] 630 SERIES NOTE:Consult Consult Delphi NOTE: Packard Consult and/or Delphi NOTE: Amp Packard Consult on actual and/or Delphi part Amp numbers Packard on actual and/or and part availability. Amp numbers on actual and part availability. numbers and availability. 12015869 20-18 .5-.8 12015832 10 5.0 12084590 .820[20.83] AMP a registered registered trademark oftrademark AMP Inc.ofHarrisburg, PA AMP is is a AMP trademark is a registered of AMP AMP Inc. is Harrisburg, a registered AMP PA trademark Inc. Harrisburg, of AMP PAInc. Harrisburg, PA TANG 12052224 12of 3.0 of 12052222 20-22 .35-.5 Delphi Packard Packard is is Delphi a registered Packard trademark is trademark Delphi a registered ofPackard Delphi-Packard trademark is a registered Electrical Delphi-Packard trademark Systems Electrical Warren, Delphi-Packard Systems Ohio Warren, Electrical Warren, Ohio Systems Ohio ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT Delphi a registered of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems TANGOhio SYMBOL Warren, = SHOWS 12015870 1.0-2.0 16-14 16-12 1.3-3 PACKARD SYMBOL 60253-2 60253-1 AMP .820[20.83] .820[20.83] (2)22-18 (2).5-.8 A METRI-PACK (2) 16 (2) 1.3 .820[20.83] .820[20.83] .820[20.83]12020035 .820[20.83] 250.820[20.83] SERIES B 630 SERIES .820[20.83] 12015869 20-18 .5-.8 12015832 42100-2 18-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 12052222 20-22 .35-.5 60295-2 22-18 .3-.9 60295-1 TANG SYMBOL = SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT 16-12 1.3-3 SYMBOL NOTE: AMP Consult Delphi Packard Amp on actual part numbers and availability. 60253-1and/or60253-2 .770[19.56] (2) 16 PA (2) 1.3 AMP is a registered trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, 250 SERIES B Delphi Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems Warren, Ohio 42100-2 18-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 .920[23.37] A B A B PACKARDPACKARD 630 630 PACKARD 630 VC1 VC1 B AMP, PACKARD AMP, PACKARD 58 58 PACKARD 630 VC1 VC1 B B .820[20.83] A AMP, 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD AMP, PACKARD 58 58 PACKARD AMP, PACKARD 58 VC1 B VC2 PACKARD 630 VC2 VC1 B A PACKARD 630 VC2 VC2 1.266[32.16] AMP AMP AMPAMP AMP AMP 5 B AMP AMP, PACKARD 58 679 VC2 4 73 45 2 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] .770[19.56] .950[24.13] B 69 15 8 6 A PACKARD 630 VC2 9 .920[23.37] B 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] A VC2 VC2 VC2 10 10 3 23 1VC1 1053 630 6729 417VC1 845 56 96 9 10 73 4 2 51 689 10 10 3 3 2 128 1 7104 8 3 5 2 619 8 7 4 28 10 1 38 2 1 784PACKARD .920[23.37] 1.170[29.72] 1.170[29.72] 1.170[29.72] A PACKARD 630 B 1.170[29.72] .820[20.83] B AMPAMP, PACKARD 58 .920[23.37] .770[19.56] .770[19.56] .920[23.37] 60295-2 22-18 .3-.9 60295-1 .820[20.83] .920[23.37] .820[20.83] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] NOTE: Consult Delphi Packard and/or Amp on actual partAnumbers and availability. A AMP is a registered trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, PA VC2 A A A A A .920[23.37] .920[23.37] PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 Delphi Electrical Systems Warren, Ohio VC1Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard VC1 PACKARD 630 .770[19.56] .770[19.56] B A B B B AMP, 58 PACKARD 58AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARDPACKARD 58 AMP, AMP, PACKARD PACKARD 58 630 3 2 1 8 7 3 4 235 1 62 8 1.466[37.24] 1 87 4 .950[24.13] 1.170[29.72] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] A A A 1.170[29.72] PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 .950[24.13] .950[24.13] .950[24.13] PACKARD 630 1.466[37.24] 1.250[31.75] B PACKARD 630 A PACKARD PACKARD 630 630 1.250[31.75] 5 A B B AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD PACKARD 630 58 6 7 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 1.250[31.75]B AMP 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] .770[19.56] 1.250[31.75] AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 10MARKING 3 2 DETAIL 1A 8 MARKING DETAIL 7MARKING 4DETAIL 5DETAIL 69 A 10 3 VC22 1 DETAIL 8 7 4 5 6MARKING 9 MARKING 3 2MARKING 1 8 DETAIL 7 4 5DETAIL 6 MARKING MARKING DETAIL MARKING MARKING DETAIL DETAIL MARKING MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL DETAIL DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING AMP, PACKARD 58 1.466[37.24] AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP A PACKARD 630 FRONT VIEWB MARKING VC1 FRONT VIEW DETAIL 1.266[32.16] FRONT VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 PACKARD 630 .920[23.37] 1.466[37.24] REAR VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 FRONT VIEW VC1 10 3 2 1 8 VC1 CONNECTOR HOUSING 1.266[32.16] CONNECTOR HOUSING FRONT REARVIEW VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 8 7 4 5 69 VC1 10 3 2 1 VC1 VC1 CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING A MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL A 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] VC1 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 VC1 FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW VC1 B CONNECTOR HOUSING MARKING DETAIL VC2 MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW AMP 69 1.466[37.24] B AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP (For AMP terminals only) MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW PACKARD 630 REAR VIEWMARKING FRONT REAR VIEW VIEW .950[24.13] FRONT VIEW DETAIL 1.466[37.24] REAR VIEW AMP CONNECTOR HOUSING MARKING DETAIL (For AMP terminals only) REAR VIEW 10 3 2 1VC2 8 7 4 5 69 CONNECTOR HOUSING VC2 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] CONNECTOR (For AMP HOUSING terminals only) B Contura X Boot (P/N VB1-01) MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW FRONT REAR VIEW VIEW DETAIL 1.170[29.72] REAR FRONT VIEW VIEW MARKING B REAR VIEW DETAIL 1.250[31.75] FRONT VIEW MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW 1.050[26.67] VC1 CONNECTOR HOUSING 1.050[26.67] VC2 CONNECTOR HOUSING (For AMP terminals only) MARKING DETAIL B FRONT AMP, PACKARDVIEW 58 3 2 1 8 REAR VIEW MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 10 3 2 1 8 VC2 7 VC2 4 5 69 VCH VC2 VCH 3 VCH 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING A A MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL VCH 1.250[31.75] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 (For AMP terminals (Foronly) AMP terminals (For only) AMP terminals only) VC2 VC2 VC2 FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW .950[24.13] MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW 5 FRONT VIEW MARKING 1.266[32.16] .920[23.37] FRONT VIEW AMP AMP, PACKARD 58 7 4 A PACKARD 630 VC1 REARFRONT VIEW VIEW REAR B VIEW MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW CONNECTOR HOUSING MARKING DETAIL B REAR VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 VCH 7 4 5 6 HOUSING VCH CONNECTOR 1.250[31.75] CONNECTOR HOUSING Additional V-Series Ratings MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW 1.050[26.67] 1 MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW VCH CONNECTOR HOUSING .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive VB1-01 VB1-01 4VB1-01 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125 CONTURA X BOOT CONTURA X BOOT CONTURA X BOOT VAC 1/2 HP, No Agency Listings 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125 VAC 1/2 HP, UL Recognized, CSA Certified 51 62 15A 125VAC 1/2 HP, 12(2)A 125 VAC μ T85 1.050[26.67] 15A 125VAC 1/2VB1-01 HP, 12(6)A 125 VAC T85 72 VB1-01 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT .757[19.23] .757[19.23] 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 82 10A CONTURA X BOOT 1/2 HP 125-250VAC, 12(2)A 250 VAC μ T85 2.000[50.80] 1.050[26.67].757[19.23] VB1-01 15A 125VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250VAC, 12(6)A 250 VAC T85 92 10A 250VAC, 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT B VB1-01 15A 24V 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT C 20A 18V .757[19.23] D 20A 12V .757[19.23] E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuits 1, 4, A, & D only) 3.99 [101.35] 3.99 [101.35] .757[19.23] 3.99 [101.35] F 10A 14V, 6A, 14VT (circuit G only) .757[19.23] GVRT 20A 6V VRT VRT ACTUATOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR REMOVAL H REMOVAL 20A 3V REMOVAL 3.99 [101.35] .900 [22.86] .900 [22.86] .900 [22.86] TOOL TOOL TOOL L bracket) 15A 10A 250VAC, (For flush (For125 flush VAC, bracket) (For flush bracket) 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC; 6A 125 VAC L M VRT.4VA/20A 12V (combi-contact) ACTUATOR REMOVAL .900 [22.86] TOOL (combination gold/silver contacts for borderline dry circuit applications) (For flush bracket) 3.99 [101.35] N .4VA/15A 24V (combi-contact) 3.99 [101.35] VRT(combination gold/silver contacts for borderline dry circuit applications) 3.99 [101.35] 2.000[50.80] 2.000[50.80] 1.050[26.67] 2.000[50.80] 1.050[26.67] Contura II, III, IV & V Actuator TOP TOP TOP INSERT POINTS UNDER INSERT POINTS UNDER INSERT POINTS UNDER ACTUATOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET ANDHOLD PUSH FLUSH ON BRACKET AND HOLD PUSH FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN IN IN TOP TOP Removal Tool (P/N VRT) TOP TOP INSERT POINTS UNDER ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN TOP TOP TOP INSERT POINTS UNDER ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN TOP TOP 36 ACTUATOR REMOVAL TOOL (For flush bracket) VRT ACTUATOR REMOVAL VRT NOTESACTUATOR .900 [22.86] TOOL REMOVAL Consult factory to determine availability for individual circuits and their HP rating. (For flush bracket) .900 [22.86] TOOL flush with bracket) 1. Not (For avaiable Contura 7 or 14 rocker styles. .900 [22.86] INSERT POINTS UNDER TOP ACTUATOR INSERT HOLD POINTSFLUSH UNDER ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH TOP IN Ratings 6 - 9 are UL, CSA & VDE certified, require terminations A or B for double pole circuits, & are not available with illumination circuits 4, 8, D, J, N, & T or with wire lead or solder lug terminations. Circuits 1, 4, A, D, H, M & E are not available with rating 6 & 8. Rating 7 & 9 only available with circuits 1, 4, A & D. Circuits 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, K, L are 1/2 HP 250VAC only with rating 8. Ratings 6 & 7 must specify lamp code 1 (125VAC neon). Ratings 8 & 9 must specify lamp code 2 (250VAC neon). Rating L available with circuits 1, 4, A & D only. 2. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Accessories Contura Mounting Panels Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Contura Hole Plug Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.450 [36.83] .830 [21.08] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL VHP CONTURA II,III HOLE PLUG 1.240 [31.50] 1.820 [46.23] .430 [10.92] VHP CONTURA II,III HOLE PLUG VH1 STANDARD HOLE PLUG (No wing serrations) (With VC1 connector attached) 2.000 [50.80] VH2 STANDARD HOLE PLUG (With wing serrations) 1.067 [27.10] 1.928 [48.97] VH3 CONTURA IV HOLE PLUG (No wing serrations) VH4 CONTURA IV HOLE PLUG (With wing serrations) DETAIL VIEW VH1,VH3 & VH5 HOLE PLUGS (No wing serrations for ease of removal) 1.020 [25.91] VH5 CONTURA V HOLE PLUG (No wing serrations) www.carlingtech.com VH6 CONTURA V HOLE PLUG (With wing serrations) DETAIL VIEW VH2,VH4 & VH6 HOLE PLUGS (With wing serrations) 37 W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Introduction W-Series W-Series SEALED ROCKER SWITCHES Carling Technologies set the standard for performance and aesthetics with the widely successful, often imitated, but never duplicated, V-Series rocker switches. Building further upon that platform, Carling has once again raised the bar with the fully sealed W-Series. The W-Series’ traditional appearance features complete IP68 protection, including below the panel, where the critical connection is made from the wiring harness. When used in conjunction with the integrated connector, the totally submersible W-Series provides a seal for up to ten individual wires, assuring compatibility with even the most complex circuitry. The W-Series also offers a wide variety of accoutrements, including endless illumination options featuring dual level and multicolor LEDs, progressive and hazard warning circuits, ratings up to 10A 24V, choice of paddle, rocker, locking or laser etched actuators, hundreds of standard legend choices and the electrical performance and reliability that is the hallmark of Carling Technologies products. Product Highlights: Fully sealed and submersible IP68 protection, including below the panel Tri-seal design Connector with twin locking tabs 38 www.carlingtech.com W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Design Features W-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES ILLUMINATION Choice of highly reliable SMT LED or incandescent lighting with 21 dependent or independent circuit options. BODY One piece polyester 94V0 seamless body acts as an umbrella to protect critical internal components. TRI-SEAL DESIGN Sealing at actuator, an insert molded neoprene base seal, along with wire lead seals, assures water tight, fully submersible protection. ROLLER PIN Proven reliable mechanism is lubricant free and allows for 100k electrical and 250k mechanical cycles, and withstands extreme temperatures from -40˚C to +85˚C. INTEGRATED CONNECTOR Accommodates Tyco/Amp .110 junior power timer contacts with twin locking tabs to provide a safe, secure, sealed connection. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 39 W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Contact Rating Dielectric Strength Insulation Resistance Initial Contact Resistance Life Contacts Terminals Quick Voltage Overcurrent Mechanical Endurance .4VA @ 24VDC 10 amps, 3-24VDC 1500 Volts RMS 50 Megaohms 10 milliohms max. @ 4 VDC 100,000 cycles Silver tin-oxide, 88/12 Copper with silver or gold plating Connect terminations. 3-24 VDC 15A for 50 cycles 250,000 cycles minimum Physical Lighted LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24 VDC) SealsNeoprene Base Polyester blend rated to 125C with a UL flammability rating of 94V0. Actuator Basic actuator structure molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate with a hard Nylon 66 thermoplastic surface overlay. Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Function 2 & 3 Position Rocker Style Operation Maintained & Momentary Base PA 6/6 30GF (glass filled) Actuator PA 6/6 13GF Bracket PBT 10GF Connector PBT 10GF, polarized Environmental Environmental IP68, Fully sealed Corrosion/ Flowing Mixed Gas (FMG) Chemical Splash Class III 3 year accelerated exposure per ASTM B-827, B-845 Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C, 22 cycles, 300 hours Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10-500 Hz. Vibration 2 Resonance search 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA 50-2000 ±10 G’s peak Results Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 2000 Hz 0.025 Handling/Drop One meter onto concrete floor Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Condition A, 48 Hrs. DustIP6X Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test Condition A, -55°C to 85°C Test criteria - pre and post test contact resistance Moisture Resistance/ Humidity Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact resistance Mounting Specifications Panel Thickness Range .032 to .125 For optimum panel fit, the following panel thicknesses are suggested: .032, .062, .093, .125 .830[21.08] Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) 24° full throw 1.450[36.83] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL SWITCH MOUNTING HOLE 40 www.carlingtech.com W-Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Ordering Scheme 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES W 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1121 ON NONEOFF 1222 (ON)NONE OFF 1323 ON NONE(OFF) 1424 ONNONE ON 1525 ON NONE(ON) 1626 ONOFF ON 1727 ON OFF(ON) 1828 (ON)OFF (ON) - 49 ONON ON 3 RATING B 10A 24V D 10A 12V G 10A 6V H 10A 3V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 2 .110 TAB (QC) www.carlingtech.com 10 Lens 11 Lens 0 00 12 Legend 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 LED* superbright Red AmberGreen White 2VDC A LF4 6VDC B MG5 12VDC C NH6 24VDC D PJ8 * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR 1 1 Black 9 ACTUATOR 1,3 3 Black with Laser Etched A Black 10 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #1 TERMINALS 1,4 11 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS 3,6 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red Blue 1 - B G M T - 7 C H N U 3 - D J P V - 9 E K R W 5 A - - - - Large Transparent Large Translucent Bar Transparent Bar Translucent Laser-Etched Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O OFF ON O I 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 Orientation 1 P P P Orientation 2 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 1&4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3&6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Actuator Lens Position Lamps Illumination Type Lamp Wired to Terminals O NONE A # 1 Independent 8+ 7B # 1 Down 3+ 7C # 2 Up 3+ 7D # 1 Down 3+ 7 & # 2 Down 1+ 7E # 1 Up 1+ 7 & # 2 Up 3+ 7F # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Up 3+ 6G # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Up 3+ 7H # 2 Independent 8+ 7Selections for Single Pole Witches Only: J # 1 Down 3+ 8 & # 2 Independent 6+ 7K # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Independent 6+ 7Selections for Double Pole Switches Only: L # 1 Down 3+ 6M # 2 Up 3+ 6N # 1 Down 3+ 6 & # 2 Down 1+ 4P # 1 Up 1+ 4 & # 2 Up 3+ 6R # 1 Down 3+ 7 & # 2 Up 6+ 7S # 1 Down 6+ 7 & # 2 Independent 8+ 7U # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Independent 10+ 9V # 2 Independent 10+ 9W # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Independent 10+ 7Y # 1 & # 2 Independent in Series 8+ 7Z # 1 & # 2 Independent in Parallel 8+ 7- A 7 Z 00 9 Actuator Orientation 4 W 11 D 2 B C 0 1 1 Series P P AY3-200 P AY3-100 Orientation 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 2 00 No legend this location/no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens & one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com Notes: 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red & gray actuators; Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Locking rocker version is also available, consult factory for details. 41 W-Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.000 [25.40] 1.724 [43.78] 12° 1.962 [49.83] .418 [10.62] 1.707 [43.36] 2.162 [54.91] .031 [.79] .465 [11.81] 1.664 [42.27] .110 [2.79] SWITCH SHOWN WITH CONNECTOR INSTALLED KEYING FEATURE 1.178 [29.93] .714 [18.14] 1.080 [27.43] WCH CONNECTOR (190-31214-001) 1.200 [30.48] Notes: WCH connector is intended for use with Tyco/Amp .110 Junior Power Timer, female contacts, and wire seals. For 14-16 awg wire, specify Tyco/Amp P/N 927766-3 For 16-20 awg wire, specify Tyco/Amp P/N 927770-3 Tyco/Amp cable seal P/N 828904-1 (20-18 awg wire) or P/N 828905-1 (16-14 awg wire) is required for each individual wire lead, and Tyco/Amp cable plug, P/N 828922-1, is required to seal each unused connector opening. Consult Tyco/Amp for the cable seal recommended for your specific wire gauge and thickness. 42 www.carlingtech.com LT-Series Toggle Switches - Introduction LT-Series LT-Series TOGGLE SWITCHES The LT-Series illuminated toggle switches feature up to a three-color lighting sequence from a single lamp. These lighted toggles contain neoprene bushing seals for dust and moisture protection. A variety of circuits and terminations are available. Product Highlights: 1 or 2 Pole Independent or Dependent Illumination Choice of 5 Actuator Styles Up to 3 different colors under a single lens www.carlingtech.com 43 LT-Series Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life Electrical Life Operating Temperature 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) LT-1561 1 30 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / ILLUMINATION / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 5 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC, 15A 12-28VDC Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terms Wire Leads On-None-Off LT-1510 LT-1511 LT-1514 LT-1515 On-None-(Off) LT-1520 LT-1521 LT-1524 LT-1525 (On)-None-Off LT-1530 LT-1531 LT-1534 LT-1535 On-None-On LT-1540 LT-1541 LT-1544 LT-1545 On-None-(On) LT-1550 LT-1551 LT-1554 LT-1555 On-Off-On LT-1560 LT-1561 LT-1564 LT-1565 On-Off-(On) LT-1570 LT-1571 LT-1574 LT-1575 (On)-Off-(On) LT-1580 LT-1581 LT-1584 LT-1585 Double Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terms Wire Leads On-None-Off LT-2510 LT-2511 LT-2514 LT-2515 On-None-(Off) LT-2520 LT-2521 LT-2524 LT-2525 (On)-None-Off LT-2530 LT-2531 LT-2534 LT-2535 On-None-On LT-2540 LT-2541 LT-2544 LT-2545 On-None-(On) LT-2550 LT-2551 LT-2554 LT-2555 On-Off-On LT-2560 LT-2561 LT-2564 LT-2565 On-Off-(On) LT-2570 LT-2571 LT-2574 LT-2575 (On)-Off-(On) LT-2580 LT-2581 LT-2584 LT-2585 Snapkap Style 2 5 Bright Chrome 6 Satin Chrome 7 Black Molded 2 ACTUATOR STYLE Paddle 1 1 Clear Paddle 4 Solid Color Paddle Notes: 1 Solid color paddle available with lighting sequence 01, 02, 10 or 20. 2 SnapKap Toggle Lenses are available separately. Consult factory. 3 Independent lamp is standard. Dependent lamp with ON-OFF function (including momentary) is available with Lighting Sequences 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50. (No light in OFF position.) 4 Green and blue not recommended with 125 volt or 250 volt neon lamps. 5 Additional terminations available. Consult factory for details. ( ) Indicates momentary function. 012 3 Lighting Sequence 4 Lamp Voltage 3 LIGHTING SEQUENCE 3,4 position 1 01red 02amber 03green 10red 11red 12red 13red 14red 15red 20amber 21amber 22amber 23amber 24amber 25amber 30green 31green 32green 33green 34green 35green 40blue 41blue 42blue 43blue 44blue 45blue 50clear 51clear 52clear 53clear 54clear 55clear .274[6.96] DIA .379[9.63] incandescent 006 6 volt 012 12 volt 018 18 volt 024 24 volt .168[4.27] DIA LENS neon 125N 250N .075[1.91] DIA .330[8.38] 125 volt neon 250 volt neon .055[1.40] DIA .437[11.09] .394[10.00] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] .187[4.74] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP position 3 red amber green none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear none red amber green blue clear 4 LAMP VOLTAGE 4 .125[3.18] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD position 2 red amber green --- clear clear clear clear clear --- clear clear clear clear clear --- clear clear clear clear clear --- clear clear clear clear clear --- clear clear clear clear clear .250 TAB (Q.C.) SOLDER LUG .187 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE .890[22.61] .715[18.16] .865[21.97] #6-32NC-2 THREAD .422[10.72] 6.000[152.40] .370[9.39] .500[12.70] .750[19.05] 1.375[34.92] .286[7.26] 1.088[27.64] SINGLE POLE SNAPKAP TOGGLES 5,6,7 DOUBLE POLE .250[6.35] .270[6.86] .187[4.75] .141[3.58] .187[4.75] .350[8.89] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) WIRE LEAD PRINTED CIRCUIT .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .625[15.87] TOGGLE STYLES 1,4 MOUNTING HOLE Keyway should point down for maximum water resistance .038[9.65] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 44 www.carlingtech.com F-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - Introduction F-Series F-Series SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES General purpose workhorses with options tailored to meet most any need. Ratings to 20A 277VAC, various actuator, bushing, termination, and circuit choices allow this versatile switch to easily integrate into a variety of different applications. The F-Series is appropriate for usage in low voltage DC applications. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Product Highlights: Ratings to 20A Suitable for low voltage 12/24V DC Variety of termination options Consult factory for large choice of bushing/toggle length combinations www.carlingtech.com 45 F-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life Electrical Life Operating Temperature 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary 0°F to 150°F (-17.8°C to +65.6°C) 2FA54 73 / TABS 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 3 Tab Terminals 2 ACTUATOR STYLE BAT STYLE TOGGLE 2 unsealed sealed 73 78 E3 E8 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 1 10A 250VAC; 15A 125VAC; 3/4 HP 125-250VAC Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terminals On-None-Off 2FA53 2FA53- . . . /TABS 2FA54 (On)-None-Off 6FA53 6FA53- . . . /TABS 6FA54 On-None-(Off) 6FA57 6FA57- . . . /TABS 6FA58 On-None-On 2FB53 2FB53- . . . /TABS 2FB54 On-None-(On) 6FB53 6FB53- . . . /TABS 6FB54 On-Off-On 2FC53 2FC53- . . . /TABS 2FC54 On-Off-(On) 6FC57 6FC57- . . . /TABS 6FC58 (On-Off-(On) 6FC53 6FC53- . . . /TABS 6FC54 toggle length 0.687 2.000 bushing length 0.465 0.465 3 TAB TERMINALS /TABS Tab Terminals (blank) Leave blank if tab terminals not required. Additional ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 12A 250VAC, 1HP 120-240 VAC available. Consult factory for specifics. Notes: 1 Consult factory for .187 tab, wire lead and combination screw/tab/solder lug termination callouts. 2 Additional toggle options are available. Consult factory. ( ) indicates momentary function. .075[1.91] DIA .125[3.18] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .330[8.38] .437[11.09] .394[10.00] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] .187[4.74] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP SOLDER LUG .687[17.44] .055[1.40] DIA .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE .465[11.81] #6-32NC-2 THREAD .670[17.02] 6.000[152.40] .141[3.58] .370[9.39] .500[12.70] .286[7.26] .348[8.84] 1.134[28.80] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .062[1.57] .634[16.10] .500[12.70] DIA WIRE LEAD .376[9.55] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .038[9.65] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 46 www.carlingtech.com G-Series Toggle Switches - Introduction G-Series G-Series TOGGLE SWITCHES General purpose workhorses with options tailored to meet most any need. Ratings to 20A 277VAC, international approvals, various actuator, bushing, termination, and circuit choices allow this toggle switch to easily integrate into a variety of different applications. The G-Series is appropriate for usage in low voltage DC applications. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Product Highlights: Ratings to 20A 277VAC available Metal bat or nylon bat/paddle actuator styles UL, CSA and VDE approvals for select circuits Suitable for low voltage 12/24V DC www.carlingtech.com 47 G-Series Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Electrical Life 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary Mechanical Life VDE: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 1250V - opposite polarity & across open contacts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0° to 85°C) 2GM51 73 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 3 Single Pole in Double Pole base Double Pole 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC solder lug .250 tab screw term. solder lug 2GA50 2GA51 2GA54 On-None-Off 2GK50 6GA5A 6GA5B 6GA5E (On)-None-Off 6GK5A 6GA5L 6GA5M 6GA5S On-None-(Off) 6GK5L 2GB50 2GB51 2GB54 On-None-On 2GL50 6GB5A 6GB5B 6GB5E On-None-(On) 6GL5A 2GC50 2GC51 2GC54 On-Off-On 2GM50 6GC5A 6GC5B 6GC5E On-Off-(On) 6GM5A 6GC5L 6GC5M 6GC5S (On-Off-(On) 6GM5L 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 12 (6)A 250VAC T85/55 ENEC/VDE Approved 1 2GA90 2GA91 - On-None-Off 2GK90 2GB90 2GB91 - On-None-On 2GL90 2GC90 2GC91 - On-Off-On 2GM90 Additional ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 12A 250VAC, 1HP 120-240 VAC available. Consult factory for specifics. 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 4 unsealed BAT 73 PADDLE 5 NBL3 BAT 2 D-3B-B 2 PADDLE - sealed 78 NBL8 - D-4B-B .250 tab 2GK51 6GK5B 6GK5M 2GL51 6GL5B 2GM51 6GM5B 6GM5M screw term. 2GK54 6GK5E 6GK5S 2GL54 6GL5E 2GM54 6GM5E 6GM5S 2GK91 2GL91 2GM91 toggle length 0.687 0.687 0.687 0.687 bushing length 0.465 0.465 0.379 0.379 Notes: 1 Not available with 73 or NBL3 style toggles, T55 with 78 and NBL8 style toggles. 2 All nylon bushing and toggle. 3 Consult factory for .187 tab, wire lead and combination screw/tab/solder lug termination callouts. 4 Additional actuator options available. Consult factory. 5 Nylon toggle with black ebanol plated bushing. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .687[17.44] .075[1.91] DIA .125[3.18] DIA .055[1.40] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .330[8.38] .187[4.74] .465[11.81] .437[11.09] .394[10.00] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] SOLDER LUG .778[19.76] .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE .422[10.72] .778[19.76] 1.308[33.22] .750[19.05] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP #6-32NC-2 THREAD .187[4.75] 6.000[152.40] .141[3.58] .370[9.39] .187[4.75] .500[12.70] .286[7.26] .350[8.89] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .490[22.86] PRINTED CIRCUIT .376[9.55] WIRE LEAD .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .750[19.05] .075[1.905] IEC APPROVED CONSTRUCTION .038[9.65] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 48 www.carlingtech.com P27-Series Pushbutton Switches - Introduction P27-Series P27-Series PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES The P27-Series pushbutton switches are single pole, AC rated switches suitable for general purpose applications with a shallow back panel. These switches are momentary action with a medium actuation force (26 oz. typical). The P27-Series switch is equipped with a slow-make, slow-break contact mechanism, rated at 6 amps with a nylon concave pushbutton. Product Highlights: Ratings to 6A 125VAC 3A 277VAC Momentary On or Momentary Off circuitry .250 Tab, Solder Lug or Wire Lead terminations Shallow space saving envelope www.carlingtech.com 49 P27-Series Pushbutton Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts Electrical Life Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0°C to 85°C) 25,000 cycles P27A 1 Base Part Number 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION Single Pole Solder Lug .250 Tab Wire Leads 3A 250VAC, 6A 125 VAC, 3/4A 125V Off - (On) P27A P27B P27F On - (Off) P27L - P27T BL 2 Button Color 3 BUTTON STYLE / COLOR BL Black RD Red WH White Notes: ( ) Indicates momentary function. .093[2.36] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .293[7.44] SOLDER LUG .468[11.89] DIA .250[6.35] .420[10.67] DIA .562[14.27] .075[1.90] DIA .250[6.35] 6.000[152.4] .500[12.70] .351[8.92] .250 TAB (Q.C.) (Momentary ON only) INTEGRATED WIRE LEAD (no exposed conductors) TERMINAL TYPE KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP .500[12.70] DIA .542[13.76] 1.183[30.04] .524[13.30] MOUNTING HOLE *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 50 www.carlingtech.com M-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction M-Series M-Series CIRCUIT BREAKER The M-Series is a low cost, miniature, hydraulic-magnetic circuit breaker which features a compact, space saving design, front panel snap-in mounting and a vertically mounted parallel pole configuration. It features various styling options to maximize your design flexibility. Choices include rocker, illuminated rocker, paddle and baton style handle actuators, push-to-reset and push-pull pushbutton actuators, as well as Visi-Rocker two color actuators. Our exclusive Rockerguard bezel helps prevent inadvertent actuation and a wiping contact mechanism assures long-term reliability. The M-Series circuit breakers are available with 1, 2 or parallel poles, 0.02 to 50 amp ratings, and 125 and 250VAC or 80VDC versions. With over 16 different time delays, 5 terminal styles, a variety of panel hardware, various colors, and legend imprinting, it assures suitability for most any application design. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Product Highlights: Parallel pole configuration fits in one rack unit MIL-PRF-55629 MIL STD 202 compliant MIL-PRF-39019F ingress protection Sealed toggle actuator Compact design Only Marine applicable ordering schemes and drawings are shown in this catalog. For complete product details, please visit www.carlingtech.com www.carlingtech.com 51 M-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Maximum Voltage 125/250 VAC 50/60 Hz, 80 VDC (See Rating Tables.) Current Ratings Standard current coils: 0.100, 0.250, 0.500, 0.750, 1.00 thru 15.0 in 1 amp increments, 18.0, 20.0, 25.0, 30.0. Other ratings available - see Ordering Scheme. Auxiliary Switch Rating SPDT; 7A 250VAC, 7A (Res) 28VDC, 4A (Ind.) 28VDC, 0.25A 80VDC (Res) (silver contacts), 0.1A 125VAC (gold contacts). Insulation Resistance Minimum of 100 Megohms at 500 VDC. Dielectric Strength UL, CSA 1500V, 50/60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals. M-Series Circuit Breakers comply with the 8mm spacing and 3750 V 50/60Hz dielectric requirements from hazardous voltage to operator accessible surfaces, per Publications IEC 380, 435, 950, EN 60950 and VDE 0805. Resistance, Impedance Values from Line to Load Terminal - based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker. RESISTANCE PER POLE VALUES from Line to Load Terminals (Values Based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker) CURRENT TOLERANCE (AMPS) (%) 0.10 - 20.0 20.1 - 50.0 ± 25 ± 35 Pulse Tolerance Curves Mechanical Endurance 10,000 ON-OFF operations @ 6 per minute with rated Current and Voltage. Trip Free All M-Series Circuit Breakers will trip on overload, even when actuator is forcibly held in the ON position. Trip Indication The actuator moves positively to the OFF position when an overload causes the circuit breaker to trip. Physical Number of Poles Internal Circuit Configs. Weight Standard Colors 1 or 2 Series with or without Auxiliary Switch. Switch Only with or without Auxiliary Switch. Approximately 30 grams/pole (Approximately 1.07 ounces/pole) See Ordering Scheme.a Environmental Designed in accordance with requirements of specification MIL PRF-55629 & MIL-STD-202G as follows: Shock Withstands 100 Gs, 6ms, sawtooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Cond. I. Instantaneous curves tested at 80% of rated current. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz, and 10 Gs 55-500 Hz, at rated current per Method 204C, Test Condition A. Instantaneous curves tested at 80% of rated current. Moisture Resistance Method 106D, i.e., ten 24-hour cycles @ + 25°C to +65°C, 80 98% RH. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90-95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs). Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (Five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C). Operating Temperature -40° C to +85° C Chemical Resistance Only the outside surfaces of the case and the handles may be cleaned with detergents or alcohol. Organic (hydrocarbon based) solvents are not recommended because they attack plastics. Caution should be taken when solvents are used to clean and remove flux from terminals. Lubricants should not be introduced into the handle/ bushing openings *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 52 www.carlingtech.com M-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: Lists UL Recognized and CSA Accepted configurations & performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. M-SERIES TABLE A: COMPONENT SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTORS Voltage Circuit Configuration Max Rating 32 50 2 65 65 1,2 65 Series 80 1 125 250 2 250 250 Current Rating Short Circuit Capacity (Amps) Poles UL / CSA Load General Breaking With Backup Without Backup Frequency Phase Full Amps Purpose Amps Fuse Fuse 0.02 - 15 --1 --1000 DC ----15.1 - 25 1 --1000 DC --0.02 - 7.5 --1 --1000 0.02 - 15 --2 --1000 DC ----15.1 - 25 2 --1000 0.02 - 15 --1 --1000 DC ----15.1 - 30 1 --1000 0.02 - 15 --2 5000 3 --DC ----15.1 - 25 2 5000 3 --0.02 - 15 --1 --600 DC ----15.1 - 30 1 --600 0.02 - 15 --1 --1000 50 / 60 1 --15.1 - 30 1 --1000 1 - 30 --1 --360 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 12 --1 --1000 50 / 60 1 --12.1 - 18 1 1000 4 --0.02 - 15 --2 --1000 50 / 60 1 --15.1 - 30 2 --1000 1 - 30 --2 --360 Application Codes UL CSA TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL0, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL0, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC3, OL1, U3 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC3, OL1, U3 Notes: 1 Polarity Sensitive 2 Available only with Special Catalog Number. Consult Factory. 3 Requires Branch Circuit Backup with a UL Listed type K-5 or RK-5 fuse rated 30 Amps maximum 4 Requires Branch Circuit Backup with a UL Listed type K-5 or RK-5 fuse rated 60 Amps maximum Table B: Lists UL Recognized,CSA Accepted and TUV and VDE Certified configurations and performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. M-SERIES TABLE B: COMPONENT SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTORS Voltage Circuit Configuration Series Max Rating Current Rating Load Frequency Phase Full Amps General Purpose Amps Poles Breaking 0.02 - 15 --0.02 - 7.5 0.02 - 15 --0.02 - 15 --0.02 - 15 --0.02 - 15 1 - 15 0.02 - 12 0.02 - 20 1 - 12 --15.1 - 25 ----15.1 - 25 --15.1 - 30 --15.1 - 30 ----------- 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 32 DC --- 50 2 DC --- 65 DC --- 65 3 DC --- 80 1 DC --- 125 50 / 60 1 250 50 / 60 1 Short Circuit Capacity (Amps) UL / CSA VDE / TUV With Without With Without Backup Backup Backup Backup Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse --1000 3000 500 --1000 3000 500 --1000 3000 500 --1000 3000 500 --1000 3000 500 5000 --3000 500 5000 --3000 500 --600 4 --500 --600 4 --500 --1000 3000 500 --360 3000 500 --1000 3000 500 --1000 3000 500 --360 3000 500 Application Codes UL CSA TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL0, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL0, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC3, OL1, U3 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC3, OL1, U3 Notes: 1 Polarity Sensitive 2 Available only with Special Catalog Number. Consult Factory. 3 Requires Branch Circuit Backup with a UL Listed type K-5 or RK-5 fuse rated 30 Amps maximum 4 TUV only, not VDE 5 Requires backup protection with a thermal magnetic circuit breaker rated 32 amps and having a Type C trip characteristic per EN60898/DIN VDE 0641 (C32A) for ratings greater than 15amps, and a thermal magnetic circuit breaker rated 16 amps and having a Type C trip characteristic per EN60898/DIN VDE 0641 (C16A) for ratings 15 amps and less www.carlingtech.com 53 M-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table C: Lists UL489A Listed and TUV Certified configurations and performance capabilities for use in Communications Equipment. M-SERIES TABLE C: UL489A Listed Circuit Configuration Series (Communications Equipment - Polarity Sensitive) Voltage Interrupting Capacity (Amps) Current Rating Poles Without Backup Fuse General Purpose Breaking Max Amps Rating Frequency UL489A TUV 80 65 1 80 DC DC DC 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.10 - 25 1 1 1 600 1000 600 ----600 Notes: 1. Available only with Special Catalog Number Table D: Lists UL489A Listed configurations and performance capabilities for use in Communications Equipment. M-SERIES TABLE D: Parallel Pole Construction UL489A Listed (Communications Equipment - Polarity Sensitive) Circuit Configuration Series Voltage Max Rating 80 65 1 Current Rating Poles General Purpose Breaking Frequency Amps DC DC 31 - 50 31 - 50 Interrupting Capacity (Amps) Without Backup Fuse UL489A 2 2 600 1000 Notes: 1. Available only with Special Catalog Number Agency Certifications UL Recognized UL Standard 1077 UL Listed UL Standard 489A 54 Component Recognition Program as Protectors, Supplementary (Guide CCN/QVNU2, File E75596) Communications Equipment (Guide CCN/DITT, File E189195) CSA Accepted Component Supplementary Protector (Class 3215 30, File 047848 0 000) CSA Standard C22.2 No. 235 VDE Certified EN60934, VDE 0642 under File 10537 TUV Certified EN60934, under License No. R9671109 www.carlingtech.com M-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle/Pushbutton UL Recognized - Ordering Scheme M M 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 4 Circuit 3 Poles 34 260 5 Frequency & Delay 6 Current Rating 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 055 060 065 070 075 080 085 090 090 210 215 220 Handle M Paddle NBaton Push Button TPush-Pull Push Button with Snap-In Mounting VPush-Pull U Push To Reset W Push To Reset 3 POLES One 2Two 4 CIRCUIT 2 without Auxiliary Switch A Switch Only (no coil), Maintained Contacts B Series Trip (Current) with Auxiliary Switch, Silver Contacts Terminal Type: M Series Trip (Current) Aux Switch .110 QC x .020 QC P 3 Switch Only, Maintained Contacts .060 Dia, Round Solder Turret Q 3,4 Switch Only, Maintained Contacts .058 Dia, Round Q.C. R 3,13 Switch Only, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. S3 Series Trip (Current) .060 Dia, Round Solder Turret T 3,4 Series Trip (Current) .058 Dia, Round Q.C. U 3,13 Series Trip, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. with Auxiliary Switch, Gold Contacts 2 3,4 Switch Only, Maintained Contacts .058 Dia, Round Q.C. 3 3,13 Switch Only, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. 4 3,4 Series Trip (Current) .058 Dia, Round Q.C. 5 3,13 Series Trip, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. 9 Series Trip (Current) Aux Switch .110 QC x .020 QC 5 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 20 50/60Hz Instantaneous 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 62 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 64 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 72 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 74 DC,Medium, Hi-Inrush 92 DC, 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 94 DC, 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush Full Load Amp Tungsten Lamp General Purpose Amps Rating Rating Poles Choose Choose Breaking Max Frequency Phase Max Current Max Choose Current Max Current Coil Coil Rating Amps Rating Code Amps Coil Rating Code Amps Rating Code Voltage DC DC DC 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz C B 9 10 Front Panel Legend Hardware Plate 11 Bushing Color 12 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 32 50 65 125 250 250 1 B B 8 Actuator Color 6 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 8 1 SERIES M 1 1 7 Terminal 1 1 1 1 15 15 15 12 15 615 615 615 612 615 25 7.5 25 25 25 625 Consult Factory 625 625 625 15 - 615 - 1 1 2 1 1 2 Notes: 1 One actuator is located in the center of each multi-pole breaker. Actuator codes V & W limited to single pole breakers only. 2 Switch Only circuits are not available with Push-To-Reset actuators. For Switch Only circuits, select Current Coil Rating from the above chart: 3 One Auxiliary Switch is supplied per breaker. On two-pole breakers, standard Auxiliary Switch mounting is in pole one. Auxiliary Switch option limited to Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. Not available with back connect screw or push-in stud terminals. 4 Mates with AMP .058” diameter pin receptacles including 60983-1 (gold plated) and 60983-2 (tin plated). 5 Actuator color is only visible in the OFF position on Push-Pull actuators. 6 All units except snap-in mounting have one hex nut installed on bushing for use behind the panel. 7 Other colors available. Consult factory. 8 TUV and VDE Certification above 15 amps is for 2-pole only and is limited to a max. of 20 amps. Screw Terminal or Push-In Stud recommended above 20 amps. 9 30 amp rating not available with delay’s 30, 32, 34, 92 or 94. 10 Screw Terminals are VDE certified only with use of ring terminal attached to wire. 11 Terminal code A available with circuit codes A & B only. 12 Printed circuit board available with UL recognized approval only. 13 Auxiliary switch (flat Q.C.) available with UL recognized approvals only. www.carlingtech.com 0.020 0.025 0.030 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.050 0.055 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.075 0.080 0.085 0.090 0.095 0.100 0.150 0.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 5171.750 4202.000 5222.250 4252.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 61010.000 7 TERMINAL 8 1 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 2 10 Screw 8-32 with Upturned Lugs 3 10 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) 8 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 5 Gloss Handle Push-Button 1A 2B 3C 4D 5E 6F 8H 9 FRONT PANEL HARDWARE 6 Handle No outer Panel Hardware A Knurled Nut Bright nickel B Bright nickel with locking ring C Black D Black with locking ring E Panel Dress Nut Bright nickel F Bright nickel with locking ring G Black H Black with locking ring J A 11 P 12 71010.500 61111.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 Push-In Stud Printed Circuit Board Actuator Color White Black Red Green Blue Yellow Orange Push-Button 1 2 10 LEGEND PLATE / BUTTON MARKING Handle Actuator Legend Plate (Actuator Styles M & N) A No Legend Plate B ON - OFF Vertical C ON - OFF Horizontal D I - O Vertical E I - O Horizontal Push-Pull Actuator Button Cap (Actuator Styles T & V) 1 No Marking 2 Rated Amps Horizontal 3 Rated Amps Line Side Down 4 Rated Amps Line Side Up Push-to-Reset Actuator Button (Actuator Styles U & W) 1 No Marking 11 BUSHING COLOR 7 B Black 12 AGENCY APPROVAL 9 C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted 55 M-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle/Pushbutton UL489A/UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme M M 1 1 Series 2 Actuator 3 Poles B 4 Circuit 14 620 5 Frequency & Delay 6 Current Rating 2 ACTUATOR 1 Handle M Paddle NBaton Push Button TPush-Pull Push Button with Snap-In Mounting VPush-Pull U 8 Push To Reset W 8 Push To Reset 3 POLES One 4 CIRCUIT without Auxiliary Switch B Series Trip (Current) with Auxiliary Switch, Silver Contacts Terminal Type: M Series Trip (Current) Aux Switch .110 QC x .020 QC S3 Series Trip (Current) .060 Dia, Round Solder Turret T 3,4 Series Trip (Current) .058 Dia, Round Q.C. U 3,13 Series Trip, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. with Auxiliary Switch, Gold Contacts 4 2,3 Series Trip (Current) .058 Dia, Round Q.C. 5 3,12 Series Trip, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. 9 Series Trip (Current) Aux Switch .110 QC x .020 QC 5 FREQUENCY & DELAY 10 DC Instantaneous 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 72 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 74 DC,Medium, Hi-Inrush 6 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 055 060 065 070 075 080 085 090 090 210 215 220 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 56 0.020 0.025 0.030 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.050 0.055 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.075 0.080 0.085 0.090 0.095 0.100 0.150 0.200 1 B B B J 9 10 Front Panel Legend Hardware Plate 11 Bushing Color 12 Agency Approval 8 Actuator Color 7 TERMINAL 4 1 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 2 Screw 8-32 with Upturned Lugs 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) 1 SERIES M 1 1 7 Terminal 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 5171.750 4202.000 5222.250 4252.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 61010.000 71010.500 61111.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 8 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 5 Gloss Handle Push-Button 1A 2B 3C 4D 5E 6F 8H 9 FRONT PANEL HARDWARE 6 Handle No outer Panel Hardware A Knurled Nut Bright nickel B Bright nickel with locking ring C Black D Black with locking ring E Panel Dress Nut Bright nickel F Bright nickel with locking ring G Black H Black with locking ring J A 10 P 11 Push-In Stud Printed Circuit Board Actuator Color White Black Red Green Blue Yellow Orange Push-Button 1 2 10 LEGEND PLATE / BUTTON MARKING Handle Actuator Legend Plate (Actuator Styles M & N) A No Legend Plate B ON - OFF Vertical C ON - OFF Horizontal D I - O Vertical E I - O Horizontal Push-Pull Actuator Button Cap (Actuator Styles T & V) 8 1 No Marking 2 Rated Amps Horizontal 3 Rated Amps Line Side Down 4 Rated Amps Line Side Up Push-to-Reset Actuator Button (Actuator Styles U & W) 1 8 No Marking 11 BUSHING COLOR 7 B Black 12 AGENCY APPROVAL 9 J UL489A Listed, TUV Certified M UL Recognized, CSA Accepted N UL Recognized, TUV Certified T UL489A Listed One actuator is located in the center of each multi-pole breaker. Actuator codes V & W limited to single pole breakers only. One Auxiliary Switch is supplied per breaker. On two-pole breakers, standard Auxiliary Switch mounting is in pole one. Auxiliary Switch option limited to Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. Not available with Back Connected Screw or Push-in Stud terminals. Mates with AMP .058” diameter pin receptacles including 60983-1 (gold plated) and 60983-3 (tin plated). Screw terminals or Push-in Stud recommended above 20 amps. Actuator color is only visible in the OFF position on Push-Pull actuators. All units have one hex nut installed on bushing for use behind the panel. Other colors available. Consult factory. Not available with UL489A Listed breakers. TUV certified to 25 amps. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted and UL Listed to 30 amps. Terminal code A available with circuit codes A & B only. Printed circuit board available with UL recognized approval only. Auxiliary switch (flat Q.C.) available with UL recognized approvals only. www.carlingtech.com M-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 57 M-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – PC Terminal Diagrams PC Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 58 www.carlingtech.com M-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 59 M-Series Circuit Breaker - Pushbutton – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 60 www.carlingtech.com M-Series Circuit Breaker - Pushbutton – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Available with Push-Pull or Push-to-Reset Actuators www.carlingtech.com 61 M-Series Circuit Breaker - Push-Pull – PC Terminal Diagrams PC Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 62 www.carlingtech.com M-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme M G 2 1 Series 2 Actuator B 4 Circuit 3 Poles 34 620 5 Frequency & Delay 6 Current Rating 1 SERIES M 7 10 Legend C 11 Bezel Color 12 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES illuminated single color F Angled G Flat 3 POLES One H C 6 9 8 Illumination Actuator Color 6 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 2 ACTUATOR 1 Non-Illuminated Two Color single color Visi-Rocker A AngledD Indicate ON B Flat E Indicate OFF 1 1 7 Terminal 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 055 060 065 070 075 080 085 090 090 210 215 220 0.020 0.025 0.030 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.050 0.055 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.075 0.080 0.085 0.090 0.095 0.100 0.150 0.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 5171.750 4202.000 5222.250 4252.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 61010.000 71010.500 61111.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 6301230.000 2Two 4 CIRCUIT 2 without Auxiliary Switch A Switch Only (no coil), Maintained Contacts B Series Trip (Current) with Auxiliary Switch, Silver Contacts Terminal Type: M Series Trip (Current) Aux Switch .110 QC x .020 QC P 3 Switch Only, Maintained Contacts .060 Dia, Round Solder Turret 3,4 Q Switch Only, Maintained Contacts .058 Dia, Round Q.C. R 3,16 Switch Only, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. S3 Series Trip (Current) .060 Dia, Round Solder Turret T 3,4 Series Trip (Current) .058 Dia, Round Q.C. U 3,16 Series Trip, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. with Auxiliary Switch, Gold Contacts 2 3,4 Switch Only, Maintained Contacts .058 Dia, Round Q.C. 3 3,16 Switch Only, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. 4 3,4 Series Trip (Current) .058 Dia, Round Q.C. 5 3,16 Series Trip, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. 9 Series Trip (Current) Aux Switch .110 QC x .020 QC 5 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 20 50/60Hz Instantaneous 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 62 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 64 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 72 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 74 DC,Medium, Hi-Inrush 92 DC, 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 94 DC, 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 One actuator is located in the center of each multi-pole breaker. 2 For Switch Only circuits, select Current Coil Rating from the above chart: 3 One Auxiliary Switch is supplied per breaker. On two-pole breakers, standard Auxiliary Switch mounting is in pole one. Auxiliary Switch option limited to Series Trip & Switch Only circuits, & is not available in single pole illuminated breakers, or Back Connected Screw or Push-in Stud terminals. 4 Mates with AMP .058” diameter pin receptacles: 60983-1 (gold plated) & 60983-2 (tin plated). 5 For neon bulb applications at 120VAC @ 47K, 1/4 WATT and for 250VAC applications @ 150K, 1/4 WATT, external resistors must be supplied by customer. 6 On Visi-Rocker breakers, Visi portion of rocker cannot be the same color as the bezel. 7 For LED (DC or rectified AC) applications, LED is mounted in the center of the rocker actuator with electrical characteristics: 100 millicandela at 20mA; Maximum power dissipation = 75mW at 25°C; Maximum forward current = 25mA; Typical forward voltage = 2.1V at 20mA; Typical reverse current = 100uA at 3V. Customer supplies the proper external resistor limiting current to these values. 8 Rocker color for LED’s and green neon lamp must be clear, smoke gray, white translucent or match color of LED or neon lamp. 9 Other colors available. Consult factory. 10 TUV 20A, VDE 15A. UL Recognized and CSA Accepted to 30 amps. Screw Terminals or Push-in Stud recommended above 20 amps. 11 TUV or VDE Certified must have I-O or Dual Legends. Legend required on Visi-Rocker breakers. 12 30 amp rating not available with delay’s 30, 32, 34, 92 or 94. 13 Screw Terminals are VDE certified only with use of ring terminal attached to wire. 14 Terminal code A available with circuit codes A & B only. 15 Printed circuit board available with UL recognized approval only. 16 Auxiliary switch (flat Q.C.) available with UL recognized approvals only. www.carlingtech.com 7 TERMINAL 1 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 2 10 Screw 8-32 with Upturned Lugs 3 10 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) 8 ROCKER ILLUMINATION Non-illuminated Neon 5 without resistor, 120VAC/250VAC LED 7, 8 without resistor with resistor, 4-8 VDC with resistor, 9-16 VDC A 14 P 15 A Neon B Red D E F Push-In Stud Printed Circuit Board Green Glow 8 C Green G H J Amber K L M 9 ACTUATOR & LEGEND COLOR Solid Color Actuator Legend 1 White Black 2 Black White 3 Red White 4 Green White 5 Blue White 6 Yellow Black 7 Gray Black 8 Orange Black Visi-Rocker 6 Visi & Legend (remainder of rocker same color as bezel) 1 White 2 Black 3 Red 4 Green 5 Blue 6 Yellow 7 Gray 8 Orange Illuminated 8 Actuator Legend A Clear White B Red Transparent White C Green Transparent White D Amber Transparent White E Smoke Gray Transparent White F White Translucent Black 10 LEGEND 11 1 No Legend 2 ON - OFF Vertical 3 ON - OFF Horizontal 4 5 6 7 I - O Vertical I - O Horizontal Dual Vertical Dual Horizontal 11 BEZEL COLOR / STYLE 9 Color without Rockerguard with Rockerguard White A1 Black B2 Gray G7 12 AGENCY APPROVAL 10 C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted 63 M-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL489A/UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme M A 1 1 Series 2 Actuator 3 Poles B 4 Circuit 14 620 5 Frequency & Delay 6 Current Rating 1 7 Terminal A 1 6 9 8 Illumination Actuator Color 7 TERMINAL 1 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 2 Screw 8-32 with Upturned Lugs 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) 1 SERIES M 2 ACTUATOR 1 Non-Illuminated Two Color single color Visi-Rocker A AngledD Indicate ON B Flat E Indicate OFF illuminated single color F Angled G Flat 3 POLES 1 One 4 CIRCUIT 2 without Auxiliary Switch B Series Trip (Current) with Auxiliary Switch, Silver Contacts Terminal Type: M Series Trip (Current) Aux Switch .110 QC x .020 QC S3 Series Trip (Current) .060 Dia, Round Solder Turret T 3,4 Series Trip (Current) .058 Dia, Round Q.C. U 3,16 Series Trip, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. with Auxiliary Switch, Gold Contacts 4 3,4 Series Trip (Current) .058 Dia, Round Q.C. 5 3,16 Series Trip, Maintained Contacts .080 Dia x .020 Flat Q.C. 9 Series Trip (Current) Aux Switch .110 QC x .020 QC 5 FREQUENCY & DELAY 10 DC Instantaneous 12 DC Short 14 72 74 DC Medium DC, Short,Hi-Inrush DC,Medium, Hi-Inrush 6 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 8 ROCKER ILLUMINATION Non-illuminated Neon 4 without resistor, 120VAC/250VAC LED 7, 8 without resistor with resistor, 4-8 VDC with resistor, 9-16 VDC 2 10 Legend A Neon B Red D E F 11 Bezel Color A 11 P 12 J 12 Agency Approval Push-In Stud Printed Circuit Board Green Glow 8 C Green G H J Amber K L M 9 ACTUATOR & LEGEND COLOR Solid Color Actuator Legend 1 White Black 2 Black White 3 Red White 4 Green White 5 Blue White 6 Yellow Black 7 Gray Black 8 Orange Black 6 Visi-Rocker Visi & Legend (remainder of rocker same color as bezel) 1 White 2 Black 3 Red 4 Green 5 Blue 6 Yellow 7 Gray 8 Orange 7 Illuminated Actuator Legend A Clear White B Red Transparent White C Green Transparent White D Amber Transparent White E Smoke Gray Transparent White F White Translucent Black CODEAMPERES 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 055 060 065 070 075 080 085 090 090 210 215 220 0.020 0.025 0.030 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.050 0.055 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.075 0.080 0.085 0.090 0.095 0.100 0.150 0.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 5171.750 4202.000 5222.250 4252.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 61010.000 71010.500 61111.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 Notes: 1 One actuator is located in the center of each multi-pole breaker. 2 One Auxiliary Switch is supplied per breaker. Auxiliary Switch option limited to Series Trip & Switch Only circuits, and is not available in single pole illuminated breakers, or with Back Connected Screw or Push-in Stud terminals. 3 Mates with AMP .058” diameter pin receptacles: 60983-1 (gold plated) & 60983-1 (tin plated). 4 For neon bulb applications at 120VAC @ 47K, 1/4 WATT and for 250VAC applications @ 150K, 1/4 WATT, external resistors must be supplied by customer. 5 For LED (DC or rectified AC) applications, LED is mounted in the center of the rocker actuator with electrical characteristics as follows: 100 millicandela at 20mA; Maximum power dissipation = 75mW at 25°C; Maximum forward current = 25mA; Typical forward voltage = 2.1V at 20mA; Typical reverse current = 100uA at 3V. Customer supplies the proper external resistor limiting current to these values. 6 On Visi-Rocker breakers, Visi portion of rocker cannot be the same color as the bezel. 7 Rocker color for LED’s and green neon lamp must be clear, smoke gray, white translucent or match color of LED or neon lamp. 8 Other colors available. Consult factory. 9 TUV Certified to 25 amps. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted and UL489A Listed to 30 amps. Screw Terminals recommended above 20 amps. 10 UL489A Listed must have ON-OFF or Dual legends. TUV Certified approvals must have I - O or Dual legends. 11 Terminal code A available with circuit codes A & B only. 12 Printed circuit board available with UL recognized approval only. 13 Auxiliary switch (flat Q.C.) available with UL recognized approvals only. 64 10 LEGEND 10 1 No Legend (Single Color or Illuminated Rocker Options Only) 2 ON - OFF Vertical 3 ON - OFF Horizontal 4 I - O Vertical 5 I - O Horizontal 6 Dual Vertical 7 Dual Horizontal 11 BEZEL COLOR / STYLE 8 Color without Rockerguard with Rockerguard White A1 Black B2 Gray G7 12 AGENCY APPROVAL 9 J UL489A Listed & TUV Certified M UL Recognized & CSA Accepted N TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted T UL489A Listed www.carlingtech.com M-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Schematic shown represents current trip circuit. www.carlingtech.com 65 M-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Dimensions apply to all variations shown. Notice that circuit breaker line & load terminal orientation on indicate OFF is opposite of indicate ON. 2 I-O, ON-OFF or dual legends available for vertical or horizontal mounting. For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 4 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 66 www.carlingtech.com M-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker – Supplementary Diagrams www.carlingtech.com 67 A-Series A-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction A-Series CIRCUIT BREAKER Well known for their proven reliability, Carling Technologies’ A-Series hydraulic magnetic circuit breakers are compact, temperature stable and designed for precision operation in OEM markets requiring general purpose as well as full load amp applications. When front panel operation and aesthetics demand a clean, contemporary design, the visi-rocker or paddle actuators are ideally suitable. A sealed toggle actuator style is also available and ideal for harsh environment applications requiring additional sealing protection. Optional rocker-guard and pushto-reset bezels, which help prevent inadvertent actuation, are also available. 1-6 poles; ratings from 0.02 to 50 amps, up to 277VAC or 80VDC; UL Recognized, UL Listed, UL1500, UL1077, TUV, VDE & CSA Product Highlights: Up to 50 amps in a compact size Various actuator styles Sealed metal toggle option tested to MIL-PRF-55629C. Meets IP68 Requirements Only Marine applicable ordering schemes and drawings are shown in this catalog. For complete product details, please visit www.carlingtech.com 68 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Maximum Voltage 277VAC 50/60 Hz, 80VDC Current Ratings Standard current coils: 0.100, 0.250, 0.500, 0.750, 1.00, 2.50, 5.00, 7.50, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0, 25.0, 30.0, 35.0, 40.0, 50.0. Other ratings available - consult ordering scheme. Standard Voltage Coils DC-6V, 12V; AC-120V, Other ratings available, consult ordering scheme. Auxiliary Switch Rating SPDT; 10.1 A - 250VAC, 1.0 A-65VDC/0.5 A - 80 VDC, 0.1A - 125VAC (with gold contacts). Insulation Resistance Minimum: 100 Megohms at 500 VDC Dielectric Strength UL, CSA - 1500V 60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals. A-Series rocker circuit breakers comply with the 8mm spacing & 3750V dielectric requirements from hazardous voltage to operator accessible surfaces per EN 60950 and VDE 0805. Resistance, Impedance Values from Line to Load Terminal - based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker. RESISTANCE PER POLE VALUES from Line to Load Terminals (Values Based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker) CURRENT TOLERANCE (AMPS) (%) 0.10 - 5.0 5.1 - 20.0 15 25 20.1 - 50.0 35 Pulse Tolerance Curves Mechanical Endurance Trip Free Trip Indication 10,000 ON-OFF operations @ 6 per minute; with rated Current & Voltage. All A-Series Circuit Breakers will trip on overload, even when the actuator is forcibly held in the ON position. The operating actuator moves positively to the OFF position when an overload causes the circuit breaker to trip. When mid-trip handle is specified, the handle moves to the mid position on electrical trip of the circuit breaker. When mid-trip handle with alarm switch is specified, the handle moves to the mid position & the alarm switch actuates when the circuit breaker is electrically tripped. Physical Number of Poles 1 - 6 Poles (handle) and 1-3 poles (rocker) at 30 Amps or less. 1 and 2 poles at 31 Amps thru 50 Amps. Internal Circuit Config. Series, (with or without auxiliary switch), Shunt and Relay with current or voltage trip coils, Dual Coil, Switch Only with or without auxiliary switch. Weight Approximately 65 grams/pole. (Approximately 2.32 ounces/pole) Standard Colors Housing - Black; Actuator- See Ordering Scheme. Environmental Designed and tested in accordance with requirements of specification MIL-PRF-55629 & MIL-STD-202 as follows: Shock Withstands 100 Gs, 6ms, sawtooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Test Condition “I”. Instantaneous and ultra-short curves tested @ 90% of rated current. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz, and 10 Gs 55-500 Hz, at rated current per Method 204C, Test Condition A. Instantaneous and ultrashort curves tested at 90% of rated current. Moisture Resistance Method 106D; ten 24-hour cycles @ + 25°C to +65°C, 80-98% RH.56 days @ +85°C, 85% RH. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90-95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs). Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (Five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C). Operating Temperature -40° C to +85° C *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 69 A-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: Lists UL Recognized & CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. A-SERIES TABLE A: COMPONENT SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTORS Voltage Circuit Configuration Series Max Rating Current Rating Load Frequency Phase Full Amps 32 65 DC DC ----- 80 DC --- 125 125 125 125 / 250 125 / 250 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 1 1 14 13 13 1 250 50 / 60 14 3 Dual Coil 277 32 65 50 / 60 DC DC 1 ----- 80 DC --- 125 50 / 60 1 125 125 / 250 125 / 250 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 14 13 13 1 1 1 14 250 50 / 60 3 Shunt Relay Switch Only 277 80 125 / 250 50 / 60 DC 50 / 60 250 50 / 60 277 80 125 / 250 50 / 60 DC 50 / 60 250 50 / 60 277 65 80 50 / 60 DC DC 250 50 / 60 277 50 / 60 1 --1 1 3 1 --13 1 3 1 ----1 3 1 0.02 - 15 31 - 50 0.02 - 30 --0.02 - 30 1 - 50 1 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 --1 - 50 0.02 - 30 31 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 30 --0.02 - 30 1 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 --1 - 50 0.02 - 30 31 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 30 --0.02 - 50 0.02 - 30 General Purpose Amps ------31 - 50 ----------------------------31 - 50 --------------31 - 50 --------------------------------31 - 50 --31 - 50 Short Circuit Capacity (Amps) UL / CSA With Backup Without Fuse Backup Fuse --5000 --7500 --7500 --7500 --3000 --2000 --1000 --3000 --3000 --1500 --3000 --3000 --1000 5000 2 --2000 1 --5000 1 ----5000 --7500 --7500 --7500 --3000 --2000 --1000 --3000 --3000 --1500 --3000 --3000 --1000 5000 2 --2000 1 --5000 1 ----7500 --3000 --3000 5000 2 --5000 1 ----7500 --3000 --3000 5000 2 --5000 1 --- Application Codes UL CSA TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, OL0, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC3, OL1, U3 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC3, OL1, U3 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC3, OL1, U3 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, OL0, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC3, OL1, U3 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 Construction Notes Rocker Version Rocker Version Handle Single Pole Break Two Pole Break Rocker Version Rocker Version Single Pole Break Two Pole Break not applicable Notes: 1 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse (15A minimum) at no more than 4 times the rating of the protector. 2 Same as note 1, except that backup fuse is limited to 80 A maximum. 3 2 pole protector required (with one pole per power line) for: 125/250 VAC, 1 pole protector required for : 125 VAC, 1Ø Power System. 4 Satisfies the requirements of clause 11.2.8.2.5 of CSA STD C22.2 No 100 for the use of supplementary protectors with portable generators. 70 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table B: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted, VDE & TUV Certified configurations & performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 Notes: 1 General Purpose Ratings for UL/CSA Only. 2 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse (15A minimum) at no more than 4 times the rating of the protector. 3 Same as note 2, except that backup fuse is limited to 80 A maximum. 4 Satisfies the requirements of clause 11.2.8.2.5 of CSA STD C22.2 No 100 for the use of supplementary protectors with portable generators. www.carlingtech.com 71 A-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table C: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical and Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596). Ignition Protected per UL 1500. UL Classified Small Craft Electrical Devices, Marine in accordance with ISO 8846 (Guide UZMK, File MQ1515) as Marine Supplementary Protectors. A-SERIES TABLE C: UL1500 (Marine Ignition Protected) VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION CURRENT RATING SHORT CIRCUIT CAPACITY (AMPS) APPLICATION CODES MAX. RATING FREQUENCY PHASE FULL LOAD AMPS WITHOUT BACKUP FUSE UL CSA 14 1 DC --- 0.02 - 50 5000 TC1,OL1,U1 TC1,OL1,U1 32 1 65 DC --- 0.02 - 50 5000 TC1,OL1,U2 TC1,OL1,U2 DC --- 0.02 - 50 3000 TC1,OL1,U1 TC1,OL1,U1 125 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 3000 TC1,OL1,U2 TC1,OL1,U2 125 / 250 50 / 60 12 0.02 - 50 3000 TC1,OL1,U2 TC1,OL1,U2 250 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 30 1500 TC1,OL1,U1 TC1,OL1,U1 SERIES Notes: Notes: 1 Available with special catalog number only (consult factory). 2 2 pole protector required (with one per power line) for 125 / 250 VAC. 1 pole protector required for 125 VAC 1 phase power system 1 Available with Special Catalog Number Only (consult factory) 2 2 pole protector required (with one per power line) for 125 / 250 VAC. 1 pole protector required for 125 VAC 1 phase power system Table D: Lists UL Listed configurations and performance capabilities as Circuit Breakers for use in Communications Equipment (Guide DITT, File E189195), under UL489A. Notes: 1 Parallel Pole Construction Agency Certifications UL Recognized UL Standard 1077 Component Recognition Program as Protectors Supplementary (Guide CCN/QVNU2, File E75596) CSA Accepted Component Supplementary Protector under Class 3215 30, File 047848 0 000 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 235 UL Standard 508 Switches, Industrial Control (Guide CCN/NRNT2, File E148683) TUV Certified EN60934, under License No. R72103448 UL Standard 1500 Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical & Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596) Ignition Protection VDE Certified EN60934, VDE 0642 under File No. 10537 UL Listed UL Standard 489A 72 Communications Equipment (Guide CCN/DITT, File E189195) www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme A A 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 10 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES A C 10 Mounting/ Barriers 11 Agency Approval 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 A Handle, one per pole B Handle, one per multipole unit S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 POLES 1 One 2 Two 1 B 1 8 9 Terminal Actuator Color 3 4 Three Four 5 6 Five Six 4 CIRCUIT A 2 Switch Only (No Coil) F 3 B Series Trip (Current) G 3 C Series Trip (Voltage) H 3,4 D 3 Shunt Trip (Current) 3 E Shunt Trip (Voltage) K 3,4 Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 5 5 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 7 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 S.P.S.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 7 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 7 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 7 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 7 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 7 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 7 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided un-assembled with multi-pole units. B: Handle location as viewed from front of breaker: 2 pole - left pole 3 pole - center pole 4 pole - two handles at center poles 5 pole - three handles at center poles 6 pole - four handles at center poles S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B, C, D, E, F, G, H and K. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B & C. 2 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 6 poles, and only available when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.), For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 3 Available with terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 50A amps maximum. 4 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 5 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip & Switch Only circuits: ≤ 30A - supplied with standard half shells. 35-50A - supplied with extended boat (B-Style) half shells. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Separate pole type voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 and 20. 7 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted & TUV Certified to 50 amps. 8 VDE Certification available with single pole breakers with DC Delay only. UL Recognition and CSA Accepted available in one and two pole breakers. 9 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, M and Q.. 10 Terminal Code 1: VDE Certification up to 25 amps and UL Recognition and CSA Certification up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 11 Terminal Codes 3, 5, E and H (Bus Type) with VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers, and Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only VDE Certified when the washers are used. 12 Terminal Code L: VDE Certified available up to 12A. UL Recognized & CSA Accepted available up to 30A. 13 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Accepted, with Circuit Codes A, B and C. Two pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 40 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Accepted with Circuit Codes A, B and C. 14 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE certification. 15 Single pole only. www.carlingtech.com 0200.020 2250.250 4202.000 0250.025 2300.300 5222.250 0300.030 2350.350 5272.750 0350.035 2400.400 4303.000 0400.040 2450.450 4353.500 0450.045 2500.500 4404.000 0500.050 2550.550 4454.500 0550.055 2600.600 4505.000 0600.060 2650.650 4555.500 0650.065 2700.700 4606.000 0700.070 2750.750 4656.500 0750.075 2800.800 4707.000 0800.080 2850.850 4757.500 0850.085 2900.900 4808.000 0900.090 2950.950 4858.500 0950.095 4101.000 4909.000 2100.100 5121.250 4959.500 2150.150 4151.500 610 10.000 2200.200 517 1.750 71010.500 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 6 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 CODEAMPERES A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC 8 TERMINAL 9 1 10 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) E 11 Screw M4 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 11 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 11 11 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs L 12 0.250 Q.C./ Solder Lug & 30° bend M 11 M6 Threaded Stud 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) Q 14Push-In Stud & 30° bend R Screw M4 with upturned lugs 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs & 30° bend & 30° bend T 11 Screw M4 (Bus Type) 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend P 13 Printed Circuit Board Terminals B Screw M5 with upturned lugs S 13 Push-On 0.110 Tab (Q.C.) C Screw M4 with upturned lugs 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF White AB Black CD Red FG Green HJ Blue KL Yellow MN Gray PQ Orange RS Black (short handle)15 TU Dual Legend Color 1Black 2White 3White 4White 5White 6Black 7Black 8Black 9White 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches A 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 ISO M3 x 5mm B ISO M3 x 5mm (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.75” wide bezel 5 without Handleguard 6 without Handleguard (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.96” wide bezel 7 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; multipole units have .105” bezel overhang on all sides 8 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; (multipole only) .105” bezel overhang on all sides BARRIERS no yes no yes no yes no yes 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted 73 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL489A – Ordering Scheme A A 1 1 Series 2 Actuator 3 Poles B 0 4 Circuit 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 14 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 ACTUATOR 1 A Handle, one per pole S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 Two 3 Three 4 Four 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 52 3 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 3 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 3 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 335.000 640 340.000 645 345.000 650 350.000 8 TERMINAL 5 1 6 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs & 30° bend 3 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) B Screw M5 with upturned lugs 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 5 7 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) M 7 M6 Threaded Stud & 30° bend P 8 Printed Circuit Board Terminals 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Q 9 Push-In Stud & 30° bend 74 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color M T 10 Mounting/ Barriers 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator Color ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White B1 Black Black D2 White Red G3White Green J4White Blue L5White Yellow N6Black Gray Q7Black Orange S8Black Black (short handle) 10 U9White 1 SERIES A 5 AUXILIARY/ALARM SWITCH 2 7 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 8 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 9 1 B 1 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches A 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 ISO M3 x 5mm B ISO M3 x 5mm (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.75” wide bezel 5 without Handleguard 6 without Handleguard (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.96” wide bezel 7 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; multipole units have .105” bezel overhang on all sides 8 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; (multipole only) .105” bezel overhang on all sides BARRIERS no yes no yes no yes no yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL T UL489A Listed K UL489A Listed, VDE Certified J UL489A Listed, TUV Certified Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided un-assembled with multi-pole units. S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. 2 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 3 VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL489A Listed to 50 amps. 4 VDE Certification available with single pole breakers only. UL489A Listing available with one and two pole breakers. 5 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9 G, H, M and Q. 6 Terminal Code 1 (Push-On) available up to 25 amps with VDE Certification and 30 amps with UL489A Listing, but is not recommended over 20 amps. 7 Terminal Codes 3, 5 and H (Bus Type) with VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers, and Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only VDE Certified when the washers are used. 8 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL489A Listing. 9 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE certification. 10 Single pole only. www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle WORLD – Ordering Scheme A A 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 14 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES A 2 ACTUATOR 1 A Handle, one per pole B Handle, one per multipole unit S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 POLES 1 One 2 Two 3 4 Three Four 5 6 4 CIRCUIT A 2 Switch Only (No Coil) D 3 B Series Trip (Current) E 3 C Series Trip (Voltage) H 3,4 Five Six Shunt Trip (Current) Shunt Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 5 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 7 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 7 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 7 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 7 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 7 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 7 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 1 A 1 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers P 11 Agency Approval 8 TERMINAL 9 1 10 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) B Screw M5 with upturned lugs 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs C Screw M4 with upturned lugs 3 11 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) E 11 Screw M4 (Bus Type) 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 5 11 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 11 & 30° bend H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) R Screw M4 with upturned lugs & 30° bend & 30° bend 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs T 11 Screw M4 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator Color I-O Dual Legend Color White A1 Black Black C2 White Red F3White Green H4White Blue K5White Yellow M6Black Gray P7Black Orange R8Black 15 Black (short handle) T9White 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches A 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 ISO M3 x 5mm B ISO M3 x 5mm (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.75” wide bezel 5 without Handleguard 6 without Handleguard (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.96” wide bezel 7 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; multipole units have .105” bezel overhang on all sides 8 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; (multipole only) .105” bezel overhang on all sides BARRIERS no yes no yes no yes no yes CODEAMPERES 2100.100 2850.850 4555.500 2150.150 2900.900 4606.000 2200.200 2950.950 4656.500 2250.250 4101.000 4707.000 2300.300 5121.250 4757.500 2350.350 4151.500 4808.000 2400.400 517 1.750 4858.500 2450.450 4202.000 4909.000 2500.500 5222.250 4959.500 2550.550 5272.750 610 10.000 2600.600 4303.000 71010.500 2650.650 4353.500 611 11.000 2700.700 4404.000 71111.500 2750.750 4454.500 61212.000 2800.800 4505.000 71212.500 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 6 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 CODEAMPERES A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC www.carlingtech.com J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC 11 AGENCY APPROVAL P TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted Q UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided unassembled with multi-pole units. S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B, C, D, E, and H. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B & C. 2 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 6 poles, and only available when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.), For .01 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 3 Available with terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 30 amps maximum. 4 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 5 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Separate pole type voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10, 20 & 30. 7 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted & TUV Certified to 50 amps. 8 Available up to two poles with AC or DC delays. 9 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G and H. 10 Terminal Code 1: TUV Certification up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 11 Terminal Codes 3, 5 , 7, 9, E, G and H (Bus Type) are supplied with Lock Washers. These breakers are only TUV Certified when the washers are used. 12 Single pole only. 75 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL489A – Ordering Scheme A F 1 1 Series 2 Actuator 3 Poles B 0 4 Circuit 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 14 6 Frequency & Delay 1 SERIES A 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker N Indicate OFF, vertical legend O Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color R Vertical legend U Horizontal legend 450 7 Current Rating 1 3 1 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers M T 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval 8 TERMINAL 5 1 6 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs & 30° bend 7 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) B Screw M5 with upturned lugs 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 5 7 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) M 7 M6 Threaded Stud & 30° bend P 8 Printed Circuit Board Terminals 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Q 9 Push-In Stud & 30° bend 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 10 ON-OFFDual 10 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 2 7 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 8 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 9 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 52 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush CODEAMPERES 76 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL T UL489A Listed K UL489A Listed, VDE Certified J UL489A Listed, TUV Certified 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 11 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 X 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes ROCKERGUARD & PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 3 6-32 x 0.195 inches no C 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 4 ISO M3 x 5mm no D ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes FRONT PANEL SNAP-IN BRACKET, 0.744” [18.90mm] wide bezel 8 without Rockerguard (single pole units only) no H with Rockerguard (single pole units only) no FRONT PANEL SNAP-IN BRACKET, 0.96” [24.48mm] wide bezel 9 without Rockerguard (single pole units only) no J with Rockerguard (single pole units only) no 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 435.000 640 440.000 645 445.000 650 450.000 Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 3 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip circuits: ≤ 30A, are supplied with standard half shells. 30-50A are supplied with extended boat (B-Style) half shells. 4 VDE Certification available with single pole breakers only. UL489A Listing available with one and two pole breakers. 5 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, M and Q. 6 Terminal Code 1 (Push-On) available up to 25 amps with TUV or VDE Certification and 30 amps with UL489A Listing, but is not recommended over 20 amps. 7 Terminal Codes 3, 5 and H (Bus Type) with TUV or VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers, and Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only TUV or VDE Certified when the washers are used. 8 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL489A Listing. 9 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE certification. 10 Color shown is Visi and Legend with remainder of rocker black. Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend. 11 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes R & U. Legend on Push-To-Reset bezel/shroud matches Visi-Color of rocker with actuator codes N & O. Rockerguard available with actuator codes C through K www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Alarm Switch available with .110 x .020 Q.C. & Solder Lug Terminals Only. www.carlingtech.com 77 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Alarm Switch available with .110 x .020 QC & solder lug terminals only. 78 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 For agency code P = .150 [3.81]. www.carlingtech.com 79 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Front Panel Snap-In Mounting Style 5 - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Recommended panel thickness: .040 [1.02] to .100 [2.54]. 3 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 80 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Front Panel Snap-In Mounting Style 7 - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Recommended panel thickness: .040 [1.02] to .100 [2.54]. 3 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 81 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Sealed Toggle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme A M 1 1 Series 2 Actuator 3 Poles B 0 4 Circuit 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 10 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES A 2 ACTUATOR 1 M Sealed Toggle, one per unit 3 POLES 1 One 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT A 2 Switch Only (No Coil) F 3 B Series Trip (Current) G 3 C Series Trip (Voltage) H 3,4 D 3 Shunt Trip (Current) E 3 Shunt Trip (Voltage) K 3,4 Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 5 5 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 7 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 S.P.S.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 7 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 7 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 7 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 7 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 7 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 7 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 0200.020 0250.025 0300.030 0350.035 0400.040 0450.045 0500.050 0550.055 0600.060 0650.065 0700.070 0750.075 0800.080 0850.085 0900.090 0950.095 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 425 2.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 1 0 1 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers C 11 Agency Approval 8 TERMINAL 9 1 10 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) E Screw M4 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs L 12 0.250 Q.C./ Solder Lug & 30° bend M M6 Threaded Stud 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) Q Push-In Stud & 30° bend R Screw M4 with upturned lugs 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs & 30° bend & 30° bend T Screw M4 (Bus Type) 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend P 12 Printed Circuit Board Terminals B Screw M5 with upturned lugs S Push-On 0.110 Tab (Q.C.) C Screw M4 with upturned lugs 9 LEGEND PLATE 0 No legend plate 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLEBARRIERS 1 Standard Hex Nut no A Standard Hex Nut (multipole only) yes 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted Notes: 1 Actuator Code M: Handle location as viewed from front of panel: 2 pole - right pole 3 pole - center pole 2 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 3 poles. Only available when tied to a protected pole. For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 3 Available with terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 30 amps maximum. 4 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 5 Auxiliary Switch available on Series Trip & Switch Only circuits, limited to 30 amps. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 and 20. 7 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted & TUV Certified to 50 amps. 8 UL Recognition and CSA Certification available on one and two pole breakers. 9 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, B, F, G, H, M and Q. 10 Terminal Code 1: UL Recognition and CSA Certification up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 11 Terminal Code L : available up to 30A. 12 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 50 amps, with Circuit Codes A, B and C. Two pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 40 amps with Circuit Codes A, B and C. OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 6 CODEAMPERES A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC 82 A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Sealed Toggle - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 83 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme A F 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 24 630 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 3 1 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers D 11 Agency Approval 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 1 SERIES A CODEAMPERES 0200.020 2250.250 4202.000 0250.025 2300.300 5222.250 0300.030 2350.350 5272.750 0350.035 2400.400 4303.000 0400.040 2450.450 4353.500 0450.045 2500.500 4404.000 0500.050 2550.550 4454.500 0550.055 2600.600 4505.000 0600.060 2650.650 4555.500 0650.065 2700.700 4606.000 0700.070 2750.750 4656.500 0750.075 2800.800 4707.000 0800.080 2850.850 4757.500 0850.085 2900.900 4808.000 0900.090 2950.950 4858.500 0950.095 4101.000 4909.000 2100.100 5121.250 4959.500 2150.150 4151.500 610 10.000 2200.200 517 1.750 71010.500 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 8 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend H Indicate OFF, no legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker N Indicate OFF, vertical legend O Indicate OFF, horizontal legend P Indicate OFF, no legend Single color J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend L No legend Push-To-Reset , Single color R Vertical legend U Horizontal legend V No legend 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 CODEAMPERES 3 POLES 1 One 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT F 4 A 3 Switch Only (No Coil) G 4 B Series Trip (Current) H 4,5 C Series Trip (Voltage) 4 D Shunt Trip (Current) K 4,5 E 4 Shunt Trip (Voltage) Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 6,7 5 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 7 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 S.P.S.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 9 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 9 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 9 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 9 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 9 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 9 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 3 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps & 3 poles, are available only when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.), For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 4 Available with terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 30 amps maximum. 5 Consult factory for Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 6 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip & Switch Only circuits: ≤ 30A, are supplied with standard half shells. 30-50A are supplied with extended boat (B-Style) half shells. 7 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 8 Separate pole type voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 & 20. 9 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted & TUV Certified to 50 amps. 10 Series Trip current ratings: VDE Certification available with single pole breakers with DC Delay only. UL Recognition & CSA Accepted available in one and two pole breakers. 11 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, M and Q. 12 Terminal Code 1: VDE Certification up to 25 amps and UL Recognition and CSA Accepted up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 13 Terminal Codes 3, 5 E & H (Bus Type) with VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers; Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only VDE Certified when the washers are used. 14 VDE Cert. available up to 12 amps. UL Rec. & CSA Accepted available up to 30 amps. 15 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Accepted, with Circuit Codes A, B & C. Two pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 40 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Certification with Circuit Codes A, B and C. 16 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE. 17 Terminal Code S used on voltage coil circuit constructions only. 18 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black. 19 Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend with actuator. None = no legend on actuator 20 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes R, & U. Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud matches Visi-color of rocker with actuator codes N & O. Rockerguard available with actuator codes C through L. 84 A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC 8 TERMINAL 11 1 12 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) E 13 Screw M4 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 3 13 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 13 13 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 5 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs L 14 0.250 Q.C./ Solder Lug & 30° bend M 13M6 Threaded Stud 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) P 15 Printed Circuit Board Terminals & 30° bend Q 16Push-In Stud 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs R Screw M4 with upturned lugs & 30° bend & 30° bend 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) S 17 Push-On 0.110 Tab (Q.C.) & 30° bend & 30° bend B Screw M5 with upturned lugs T Screw M4 (Bus Type) C Screw M4 with upturned lugs & 30° bend 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 12 ON-OFFDual 12 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 20 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 X 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes ROCKERGUARD & PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 3 6-32 x 0.195 inches no C 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 4 ISO M3 x 5mm no D ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes FRONT PANEL SNAP-IN BRACKET, 0.744” [18.90mm] wide bezel 8 without Rockerguard (single pole units only) no H with Rockerguard (single pole units only) no FRONT PANEL SNAP-IN BRACKET, 0.96” [24.48mm] wide bezel 9 without Rockerguard (single pole units only) no J with Rockerguard (single pole units only) no 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme A 1 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 24 630 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker 5 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 6 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color 7 Vertical legend 8 Horizontal legend 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT F 4 A 3 Switch Only (No Coil) G 4 B Series Trip (Current) H 4,5 C Series Trip (Voltage) 4 D Shunt Trip (Current) K 4,5 E 4 Shunt Trip (Voltage) Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 6,7 5 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 7 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 S.P.S.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 6 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 6 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 9 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 9 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 9 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 9 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 9 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 0200.020 2250.250 4202.000 0250.025 2300.300 5222.250 0300.030 2350.350 5272.750 0350.035 2400.400 4303.000 0400.040 2450.450 4353.500 0450.045 2500.500 4404.000 0500.050 2550.550 4454.500 0550.055 2600.600 4505.000 0600.060 2650.650 4555.500 0650.065 2700.700 4606.000 0700.070 2750.750 4656.500 0750.075 2800.800 4707.000 0800.080 2850.850 4757.500 0850.085 2900.900 4808.000 0900.090 2950.950 4858.500 0950.095 4101.000 4909.000 2100.100 5121.250 4959.500 2150.150 4151.500 610 10.000 2200.200 517 1.750 71010.500 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 8 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 CODEAMPERES A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC www.carlingtech.com 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers E 11 Agency Approval 8 TERMINAL 11 1 12 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) E 13 Screw M4 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 3 13 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 13 13 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 5 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs L 14 0.250 Q.C./ Solder Lug & 30° bend M 13M6 Threaded Stud 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) P 15 Printed Circuit Board Terminals & 30° bend Q Push-In Stud 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs R Screw M4 with upturned lugs & 30° bend & 30° bend 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) S 16 Push-On 0.110 Tab (Q.C.) & 30° bend & 30° bend B Screw M5 with upturned lugs T Screw M4 (Bus Type) C Screw M4 with upturned lugs & 30° bend 1 SERIES A 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 3 1 8 Terminal J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 17 ON-OFFDual 17 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 18 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole FLAT ROCKER ACTUATOR 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 X 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes 19 RECESSED OFF SIDE ROCKER ACTUATOR 5 6-32 x 0.195 inches no E 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 6 ISO M3 x 5mm no F ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL,Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 3 6-32 x 0.195 inches no C 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 4 ISO M3 x 5mm no D ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 3 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps & 3 poles. Only available when tied to a protected pole. For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 4 Available with terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 30 amps maximum. 5 Consult factory for Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 6 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip & Switch Only circuits: ≤ 30A, are supplied with standard half shells. 30-50A are supplied with extended boat (B-Style) half shells. 7 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 8 Separate pole type voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 & 20. 9 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted & TUV Certified to 50 amps. 10 UL Recognition, CSA Acceptance & TUV Certification available in one and two pole breakers. 11 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, M and Q. 12 Terminal Code 1: Available up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 13 Terminal Codes 3, 5 E & H (Bus Type) with TUV, are supplied with Lock Washers; Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with TUV is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only TUV Certified when the washers are used. 14 TUV Cert. available up to 12 amps. UL Rec. & CSA Accepted available up to 30 amps. 15 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 50 amps with UL Recognition, CSA Accepted & TUV Certification, with Circuit Codes A, B and C. Two pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 40 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Accepted with Circuit Codes A, B and C. 16 Terminal Code S used on voltage coil circuit constructions only. 17 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black, Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend. 18 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes 7 & 8. Legend on Push-To-Reset bezel/shroud matches Visi-Color of rocker with actuator codes 5 & 6. 19 Recessed “off-side” available with actuator codes 1, 2, 3 & 4. Legends on rocker are available in ink stamping only. 85 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL 489A – Ordering Scheme A 1 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 14 630 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker 5 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 6 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color 7 Vertical legend 8 Horizontal legend 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 3 7 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 8 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 9 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 52 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 0200.020 0250.025 0300.030 0350.035 0400.040 0450.045 0500.050 0550.055 0600.060 0650.065 0700.070 0750.075 0800.080 0850.085 0900.090 0950.095 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 86 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers M T 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval 8 TERMINAL 5 1 6 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs & 30° bend 3 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) B Screw M5 with upturned lugs 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 5 7 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) M 7 M6 Threaded Stud & 30° bend P 8 Printed Circuit Board Terminals 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Q 9 Push-In Stud & 30° bend 1 SERIES A 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 3 1 8 Terminal 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 435.000 640 440.000 645 445.000 650 450.000 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 11 ON-OFFDual 11 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 12 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole FLAT ROCKER ACTUATOR 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 X 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes RECESSED OFF SIDE ROCKER ACTUATOR 5 6-32 x 0.195 inches no E 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 6 ISO M3 x 5mm no F ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL,Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 3 6-32 x 0.195 inches no C 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 4 ISO M3 x 5mm no D ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL T UL489A Listed J UL489A Listed, TUV Certified Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 3 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip circuits: ≤ 30A, are supplied with standard half shells. 30-50A are supplied with extended boat (B-Style) half shells. 4 VDE Certification available with single pole breakers only. UL489A Listing available with one and two pole breakers. 5 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, M and Q. 6 Terminal Code 1 (Push-On) available up to 25 amps with TUV or VDE Certification and 30 amps with UL489A Listing, but is not recommended over 20 amps. 7 Terminal Codes 3, 5 and H (Bus Type) with TUV or VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers, and Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only TUV or VDE Certified when the washers are used. 8 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL489A Listing. 9 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE certification. 10 Color shown is Visi and Legend with remainder of rocker black. Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend. 11 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes R & U. 12 Legend on Push-To-Reset bezel/shroud matches Visi-Color of rocker with actuator codes N & O. Rockerguard available with actuator codes C through K www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Recessed Paddle – Ordering Scheme A Y 2 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Auxiliary Switch 24 620 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES A 2 ACTUATOR 1 Y Single Color Recessed Paddle Actuator with Vertical Legends 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 4 CIRCUIT A Switch-Only (No Coil) B Series Trip (Current) C Series Trip (Voltage) D Shunt Trip (Current) E Shunt Trip (Voltage) Two F G H K 3 Three Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Current Coil 5 AUXILIARY SWITCH 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T. with 0.093 Q.C. Terminals 2 S.P.D.T. with 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 3 S.P.D.T. with 0.139 Solder Lug Terminals 4 S.P.D.T. with 0.110 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) 5 S.P.D.T. with 0.093 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) 6 S.P.S.T.-N.O. with 0.139 Solder Lug Terminals 7 S.P.S.T.-N.O. with 0.110 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) 8 S.P.S.T.-N.O. with 0.187 Q.C. Terminals 9 S.P.D.T. with 0.187 Q.C. Terminals 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 3 3 DC, 50/60 Hz Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 50/60 Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60 Hz Ultra Short 22 24 26 42 44 46 52 54 56 50/60 Hz Short 50/60 Hz Medium 50/60 Hz Long 50/60 Hz Short Hi-Inrush 50/60 Hz Medium Hi-Inrush 50/60 Hz Long Hi-Inrush DC, Short, Hi-Inrush DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 4 CODEAMPERES 2200.200 2950.950 4606.000 2250.250 4101.000 4656.500 2300.300 5121.250 4707.000 2350.350 4151.500 4757.500 2400.400 517 1.750 4808.000 2450.450 4202.000 4858.500 2500.500 5222.250 4909.000 2550.550 4252.500 4959.500 2600.600 5272.750 610 10.000 2650.650 4303.000 71010.500 2700.700 4353.500 611 11.000 2750.750 4404.000 71111.500 2800.800 4454.500 61212.000 2850.850 4505.000 71212.500 2900.900 4555.500 61313.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 645 45.000 65050.000 4 2 1 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers 8 TERMINAL 1 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) C 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs E 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) F 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) G 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs H & 30° bend L 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) M & 30° bend P 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Q & 30° bend R 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend S B Screw M5 with upturned lugs T C C 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval Screw, M4 with upturned lugs Screw, M4 (Bus Type) Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) 0.250 Q.C./Solder Lug M6 Threaded Stud Printed Circuit Board Terminals Push-In Stud Screw, M4 with upturned lugs & 30° Bend Screw, M5 with upturned lugs Screw, M4 with upturned lugs 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 5 Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White A B1 Black Black C D2 White Red F G3White Green H J4White Blue K L5White Yellow M N6Black Gray P Q7Black Orange R S8Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches A 6-32 X 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) 2 ISO M3 x 5mm B ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) BARRIERS no yes no yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING 6 A 65 VDC C 120/240 VAC (Available only on 2 or 3-Pole units) K 120 VAC M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL 7 A Without Approvals C UL Recognized and CSA Accepted T UL 489A Notes: 1 All standard catalog numbers are supplied with Vertical Legends. For Horizontal or other non-standard legends, choose “X” and order as a special catalog number. 2 For rating (T) 2 & 3 Pole not available. 3 Frequency and Time Delay ratings of (03, 20, 21, 22, 24, 26, 42, 44, 46) not available with approval T. 4 Voltage Coil Ratings starting with (J, K, or L) not available with approval T. 5 “OFF and/or “O” Legends are on Bracket and are only visible when the Paddle Actuator is in the off position. 6 Maximum Application Ratings (C & K) not available with approval T. 7 Not all approvals are available in all constructions. Consult factory for details. CODEAMPERES A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC www.carlingtech.com J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC 87 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Schematic shown represents current trip circuit. 4 Circuits shown for >30 amps / VDE. 88 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Dimensions apply to all variations shown. Notice that circuit breaker line & load terminal orientation on indicate OFF is opposite of indicate ON. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 4 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 89 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker Snap-In Bracket - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Dimensions apply to all variations shown. Notice that circuit breaker line & load terminal 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. Orientation on indicate “OFF” is opposite of indicate “ON” 3 Recommended panel thickness: .04 0 [1.02] to .100 [2.54] 4 All dimensions are in Inches [millimeters]. 5 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 90 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 91 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Recessed Paddle - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified 92 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - PC Terminal Diagrams PC Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Drawing illustrates A-Series with VDE certification. 2 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 3 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified www.carlingtech.com 93 B-Series B-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction B-Series CIRCUIT BREAKER Carling Technologies’ B-Series hydraulic magnetic circuit breakers are specifically designed for applications requiring extra insulation and tongue and groove half-shell constructions. The B-Series carries global regulatory safety approvals for spacing requirements and are ideal for use as general purpose as well as full load amp applications. Available with various choices of time delays, terminals, actuator styles, with a wide range of standard colors and imprinting. 1-6 poles; ratings from 0.02 to 50 amps, up to 277VAC or 80VDC; UL recognized, CSA, VDE -0642, TUV, UL-1500, UL489A Listed Product Highlights: Meet CSA Standard 22.2 No. 100 for the Generator & Welder markets Extra insulation and tongue & groove half-shell constructions UL Recognized - UL Standard 508, 1077, 1500 UL Listed - UL Standard 489, 489A CSA Accepted TUV Certified VDE Certified Only Marine applicable ordering schemes and drawings are shown in this catalog. For complete product details, please visit www.carlingtech.com 94 www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Maximum Voltage 277VAC 50/60 Hz, 80VDC Current Ratings Standard current coils: 0.100, 0.250, 0.500, 0.750, 1.00, 2.50, 5.00, 7.50, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0, 25.0, 30.0, 35.0, 40.0 and 50.0 amps. Other ratings available, see ordering scheme. Standard Voltage Coils DC - 6V, 12V; AC - 120V, other ratings available, see ordering scheme. Auxiliary Switch Rating SPDT; 10.1 AMPS - 250VAC,1.0A 65 VDC or 0.5A 80 VDC, 0.1 Amps - 125VAC (with gold contacts). VDE-1.0 Amp - 125VAC. Insulation Resistance Minimum of 100 Megohms at 500 VDC. Dielectric Strength UL, CSA-1500 V 50/60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals. B-Series circuit breakers comply with the 8mm spacing and 3750V 50/60 Hz dielectric requirements from hazardous voltage to operator accessible surfaces, between adjacent poles and from main circuits to auxiliary circuits per Publications EN 60950 and VDE 0805. Resistance, Impedance Values from Line to Load Terminal - based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker. RESISTANCE PER POLE VALUES from Line to Load Terminals (Values Based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker) CURRENT TOLERANCE (AMPS) (%) 0.10 - 5.0 5.1 - 20.0 15 25 20.1 - 50.0 35 Pulse Tolerance Curves Mechanical Endurance 10,000 ON-OFF operations @ 6 per minute; with rated Current and Voltage. Trip Free All B-Series Circuit Breakers will trip on overload, even when Handle is forcibly held in the ON position. Trip Indication The operating Handle moves positively to the OFF position when an overload causes the breaker to trip. Physical Number of Poles 1 - 6 poles at 30 Amps or less. 1 and 2 poles at 31 Amps thru 50 Amps. Internal Circuit Config. Series, (with or without auxiliary switch), Shunt and Relay with current or voltage trip coils, Dual Coil, Switch Only (with or without auxiliary switch). Weight Approximately 65 grams/pole. (Approximately 2.32 ounces/pole.) Standard Colors Housing- Black; Actuator - See Ordering Scheme. Environmental Designed and tested in accordance with requirements of specification MIL-PRF-55629 & MIL-STD-202 as follows: Shock Withstands 100 Gs, 6ms, sawtooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Test Condition “I”. Instantaneous and ultra-short curves tested @ 90% of rated current. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz, and 10 Gs 55-500 Hz, at rated current per Method 204C, Test Condition A. Instantaneous and ultrashort curves tested at 90% of rated current. Moisture Resistance Method 106D, i.e., ten 24-hour cycles @ + 25°C to +65°C, 80-98% RH. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90-95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs). Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (Five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C). Operating Temperature -40° C to +85° C *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 95 B-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: Lists UL Recognized & CSA Certified configurations and performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. Notes: 1 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse (15A minimum) at no more than 4 times the rating of the protector. 2 Same as note 1, except that backup fuse is limited to 80A maximum. 3 2 pole protector required (with one pole per power line) for: 250/125 VAC, 125/250 VAC and 208Y/120 VAC Power Systems. 1 pole protector required for : 125 VAC, 1Ø Power System. 4 Satisfies the requirements of clause 11.2.8.2.5 of CSA STD C22.2 No 100 for the use of supplementary protectors with portable generators. 96 www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table B: Lists UL Recognized, CSA, VDE & TUV Certified configurations & performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. Notes: 1 General Purpose Ratings for UL/CSA Only. 2 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse (15A minimum) at no more than 4 times the rating of the protector. 3 Same as note 1, except that backup fuse is limited to 80 A maximum. Table C: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Certified configurations and performance capabilities as Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical and Fuel Systems (CCN/Guide PEQZ2, File E75596). Ignition Protected per UL 1500. UL Classified Small Craft Electrical Devices, Marine in accordance with ISO 8846 (CCN/Guide UZMK, File MQ1515) as Marine Supplementary Protectors. Notes: 1 Available with special catalog number only (consult factory). 2 2 pole protector required (with one pole per power line) for: 250/125 VAC, 125/250 VAC and 208Y/120 VAC Power Systems. 1 pole protector required for : 125 VAC, 1Ø Power System. www.carlingtech.com 97 B-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Table D: Lists UL Listed configurations and performance capabilities as Circuit Breakers for use in Communications Equipment (CCN/ Guide DITT, File E189195), under UL489A Notes: 1 Parallel Pole Construction Table E: Lists UL Listed (489) configuration and performance capabilities as a Molded Case Circuit Breaker. B SERIES TABLE E : UL489 LISTED BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION MAX. RATING FREQUENCY PHASE SERIES SHUNT TRIP DUAL COIL CURRENT RATING INTERRUPTING CAPACITY (AMPS) FULL LOAD AMPS WITHOUT BACKUP FUSE CONSTRUCTION NOTES 120 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 1 Pole 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 2 Poles 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 2 or 3 Poles (1 Pole of a 3 Pole Unit is for Neutral Break) 120 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 1 Pole 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 2 Poles 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 2 or 3 Poles (1 Pole of a 3 Pole Unit is for Neutral Break) Agency Certifications UL Recognized UL Standard 1077 Component Recognition Program as Protectors Supplementary (Guide CCN/QVNU2, File E75596) CSA Accepted Component Supplementary Protector under Class 3215 30, FIle 047848 0 000 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 235 UL Standard 508 Switches, Industrial Control (Guide CCN/NRNT2, File E148683) TUV Certified EN60934, under License No. R72103448 UL Standard 1500 Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical & Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596) Ignition Protection VDE Certified EN60934, VDE 0642 under File No. 10537 UL Listed UL Standard 489 UL Standard 489A 98 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, (Guide DIVQ, File E129899) Communications Equipment (Guide CCN/DITT, File E189195) www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme B A 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 10 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers C 11 Agency Approval 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 1 SERIES B CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR A Handle, one per pole B Handle, one per multipole unit S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 POLES 1 One 2 Two 1 B 1 8 Terminal 3 4 4 CIRCUIT A 2 Switch Only (No Coil) B Series Trip (Current) C Series Trip (Voltage) 3 D Shunt Trip (Current) E 3 Shunt Trip (Voltage) F 3 Relay Trip (Current) Three Four 5 6 G 3 Relay Trip (Voltage) H 3,4 Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil K 3,4 Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 5 5 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 7 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 2 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 6 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 6 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long Five Six S.P.S.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 7 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 7 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 7 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 7 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 7 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 7 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided unassembled with multi-pole units. B: Handle location as viewed from front of breaker: 2 pole - left pole 3 pole - center pole 4 pole - two handles at center poles 5 pole - three handles at center poles 6 pole - four handles at center poles S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B, C, D, E, F, G, H and K. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B & C. 2 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 6 poles, and only available with VDE Certification when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.), For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 3 Available with Terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 30 amps maximum. 4 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 5 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Separate pole type voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 and 20. 7 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL Recognized and CSA Accepted to 50 amps. 8 VDE Certification available with single pole breakers with DC Delay only. UL Recognition and CSA Accepted available in one and two pole breakers. 9 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, J, K, M and Q. 10 VDE Certification up to 25 amps and UL Recognition and CSA Acceptance up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 11 Terminal Codes 3, 5 E and H (Bus Type) with VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers, and Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only VDE Certified when the washers are used. 12 VDE Cert. available up to 12 amps. UL Rec. & CSA Acceptance available up to 30 amps. 13 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Acceptance, with Circuit Codes A, B and C. Two pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 40 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Acceptance with Circuit Codes A, B and C. 14 Available with Actuator Codes A, S and T. 15 Available with voltage coils only. 16 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE approvals. www.carlingtech.com 0200.020 2250.250 4202.000 0250.025 2300.300 5222.250 0300.030 2350.350 5272.750 0350.035 2400.400 4303.000 0400.040 2450.450 4353.500 0450.045 2500.500 4404.000 0500.050 2550.550 4454.500 0550.055 2600.600 4505.000 0600.060 2650.650 4555.500 0650.065 2700.700 4606.000 0700.070 2750.750 4656.500 0750.075 2800.800 4707.000 0800.080 2850.850 4757.500 0850.085 2900.900 4808.000 0900.090 2950.950 4858.500 0950.095 4101.000 4909.000 2100.100 5121.250 4959.500 2150.150 4151.500 610 10.000 2200.200 517 1.750 71010.500 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 6 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC CODEAMPERES A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC 8 TERMINAL 9 F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 1 10 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) & 30° bend 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 3 11 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs J Screw M5 Back Connect K Screw 10-32 Back Connect 5 11 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs L 12 0.250 Q.C./ Solder Lug & 30° bend M 11 M6 Threaded Stud 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) N Screw M4 Back Connect & 30° bend P 13 Printed Circuit Board Terminals 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Q 16 Push-In Stud & 30° bend R Screw M4 with upturned lugs 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend S 15 Push-On 0.110 Tab (Q.C.) B Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend C Screw M4 with upturned lugs T Screw M4 (Bus Type) & 30° bend E 11 Screw M4 (Bus Type) Y Screw 8-32 Back Connect 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF White AB Black CD Red FG Green HJ Blue KL Yellow MN Gray PQ Orange RS Dual Legend Color 1Black 2White 3White 4White 5White 6Black 7Black 8Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only)yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm yes Rectangular Adapter Plate with mounting centers of 2.062 inches [52.37mm] and Threaded insert, 2 per pole 3 14 6-32 x 0.225 inches no C 14 6-32 X 0.225 inches (multi-pole units only)yes 14 4 ISO M3 x 6.5mm no D 14 ISO M3 x 6.5mm yes Front panel Snap-In, 0.75” [19.05mm] wide bezel 5 without Handleguard no 6 without Handleguard (multipole only) yes Front panel Snap-In, 0.96” wide bezel 7 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; no multipole units have .105” bezel overhang on all sides 8 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; yes (multipole only) .105” bezel overhang on all sides 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted 99 B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL489 Listed – Ordering Scheme B A 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 24 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 ACTUATOR 1 A Handle, one per pole B Handle, one per multipole unit S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 2 3 3 Three Two 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 4 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Solder Lug 8 S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 9 S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 21 AC Ultra Short 22 AC Short 24 AC Medium 26 AC Long 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers K G 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 6 Actuator Color ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White B1 Black Black D2 White Red G3White Green J4White Blue L5White Yellow N6Black Gray Q7Black Orange S8Black 1 SERIES B 3 POLES 2 1 One 1 B A 42 AC, Short,Hi-Inrush 44 AC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 AC, Long, Hi-Inrush 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole A 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only)yes B ISO M3 x 5mm yes Rectangular Adapter Plate with mounting centers of 2.062 inches [52.37mm] and Threaded insert, 2 per pole 7 C 6-32 X 0.225 inches (multi-pole units only)yes D ISO M3 x 6.5mm yes Front panel Snap-In, 0.75” [19.05mm] wide bezel 6 without Handleguard (multipole only) yes Front panel Snap-In, 0.96” wide bezel 8 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; yes (multipole only) .105” bezel overhang on all sides 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING C 8120/240VAC K120VAC 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 A 8 TERMINAL 4 1 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs B 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs F 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G & 30° bend H 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) J & 30° bend K 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs M & 30° bend N 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) Q & 30° bend Y 100 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 Load Terminal #8 Screw with QC Combination (Special Catalog #) Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) Screw M5 Back Connect Screw 10-32 Back Connect M6 Threaded Stud Screw M4 Back Connect Push-In Stud Screw 8-32 Back Connect 12 AGENCY APPROVAL G UL489 Listed 3 UL489 Listed, TUV Certified Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided un-assembled with multi-pole units. B: Handle location as viewed from front of breaker: 2 pole - left pole 3 pole - center pole S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B, C, D, E, F, G, H and K. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B & C. 2 All poles must be same polarity. 3 3 pole units available only when 1 of 3 poles is neutral. 4 Auxiliary/Alarm Switch circuit must be same polarity as the main circuit. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 5 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. 6 Standard actuator colors are black and white. 7 Adapter plate with mounting centers of 2.082 inches. Available with Actuator Codes A, S and T. 8 Voltage Rating available with 2 and 3-pole breakers only. 9 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] SERIES TRIP (2 TERM'S.) ANSI IEC SERIES TRIP LINE (NETZ) LINE LINE MAIN TERM'S. (SEE TABLE A) A CIRCUIT CODE AUX SWITCH CODE CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC CIRCUIT CODE AUX SWITCH CODE CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC ANSI IEC SWITCH ONLY (NO COIL) LINE (3) (NETZ) O B C O B C 2 3 4 H 0 K 0 I> LOAD (LAST) LOAD 1.730 [43.94] LOAD LOAD (LAST) SERIES TRIP WITH AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH SWITCH ONLY (NO COIL) WITH AUXILIARY SWITCH .520 [13.21] LINE SERIES TRIP W AUX SWITCH (5 TERM'S.) LINE (NETZ) LINE C C NO NO NO NC NC AUX. SWITCH TERM'S. A 2 3 4 LINE LINE (NETZ) (3) SHUNT (NEBENSCHLUSS) D E 1 LINE (NETZ) LINE (3) (NETZ) LINE (NETZ) 1 U> VOLTAGE COIL VOLTAGE COIL 1 2 I> U> 2 LOAD F G 0 VOLTAGE COIL 3 I> 3 4 4 RELAY (RELAIS) RELAY .390 [9.91] LOAD (LAST) LINE 1 RELAY 3 I> DUAL COIL; SERIES TRIP CURRENT COIL, RELAY TRIP VOLTAGE COIL RELAY (RELAIS) 2 4 LOAD (LAST) LOAD 3 2 NC ALARM SWITCH VOLTAGE COIL LOAD (LAST) 1 .780 [19.81] I> 0 RELAY TRIP RELAY TRIP (4 TERM'S.) NO LINE I> LINE NO LOAD SHUNT LOAD C DUAL COIL; SERIES TRIP CURRENT COIL, SHUNT TRIP VOLTAGE COIL SHUNT TRIP (3 TERM'S.) .390 [9.91] C ALARM SWITCH SHUNT TRIP (3) STD. AUX. SWITCH NC NC LOAD (LAST) LOAD LINE (NETZ) STD. AUX. SWITCH C 2 4 LOAD (LAST) 4 LOAD (LAST) LOAD 3 VOLTAGE COIL HANDLE POSITION VS. AUX/ALARM SWITCH MODE STANDARD C/B CIRCUIT BREAKER MODE HANDLE POSITION MID TRIP C/B MID TRIP C/B AUX. SWITCH MODE HANDLE POSITION ALARM SWITCH MODE HANDLE POSITION 30° 30° AUX. SWITCH MODE (w/o ALARM SWITCH) 30° OFF F O OF NC NO C F O OF NC NO C F O OF ON ON ON I I I NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C ON 30° NC NO 30° C 30° NC NO 90° 90° MID TRIP ELECTRICAL TRIP F O OF 30° C NC NO C MID TRIP NC NO C Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Alarm Switch available with .110 x .020 Q.C. & Solder Lug Terminals Only. www.carlingtech.com 101 B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] TERMINAL DIMENSIONAL DETAIL & RATING 1.000 [25.40] .392 [9.97] .205 [5.21] .360[9.14] .392[9.96] .250[6.35] .392[9.96] .375[9.53] .375[9.53] .069[1.75] DIA TAB (Q.C.) 30 AMP .344[8.74] .250[6.35] QC SOLDER LUG BUS #8-32 30 AMP #10-32 30 AMP M5 30 AMP M4 30 AMP #8-32 30 AMP #10-32 50 AMP .405[10.29] .437 [11.10] .093DIA [.76] UPTURN LUG M6 STUD #8-32 30 AMP #10-32 50 AMP M5 50 AMP M4 30 AMP [+.05] [-.00] .110 [2.80] .161 DIA [Ø 4.10] .110 [2.80] .051 DIA[Ø1.29] .087 [2.20] PUSH-IN STUD .126 [3.20] .287 [7.29] MATING HOLE TAB (Q.C.) .070 DIA [Ø1.80] SOLDER TYPE 1.313 [33.35] 2.230 [56.64] TYP .154 [3.91] DIA PUSH-IN STUD 50 AMP AUXILIARY SWITCH TERMINAL DETAIL +.002 -.000 .100 [2.54] .750 [19.05] BACK CONNECT 30 AMP CENTERLINE OF PUSH-IN STUD CONTACT AREA .750[19.05] 50 AMP TABLE A TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS THREAD SIZE #6-32 & M3 MOUNTING HARDWARE #8-32 & M4 THREAD TERMINAL SCREW #10-32 & M5 THREAD TERMINAL SCREW TORQUE 7-9 IN-LBS [0.8-1.0 NM] 12-15 IN-LBS [1.4-1.7 NM] 15-20 IN-LBS [1.7-2.3 NM] .520 [13.21] TABLE B LINE LINE TAB (Q.C.) MAIN 2.000 [50.80] LOAD LOAD SCREW TYPE 2.122 [53.90] SHUNT, RELAY TAB (Q.C.) & SCREW #8-32 DUAL COIL W/UPTURNED LUGS TAB (Q.C.) .110 x .020 AUX. SWITCH* SOLDER TYPE 2.612 [66.35] 2.644 [67.16] 2.537 [64.44] 2.348 [59.64] * AVAILABLE ON SERIES TRIP AND SWITCH ONLY CIRCUITS. .875 [22.23] REF BARRIER FOR UL-489 MULTI-POLE BREAKERS BARRIER FOR UL-RECOGNIZED MULTI-POLE BREAKERS SEE TABLE-B DEPTH BEHIND PANEL WHEN CALLED FOR ON MULTI-POLE UNITS, ONLY ONE AUX. SWITCH IS NORMALLY SUPPLIED, AS SHOWN IN MULTI-POLE IDENTIFICATION SCHEME. .393 [9.96] REF LINE (NETZ) ON I MID TRIP DEPTH BEHIND PANEL 2.090 [53.09] TERMINAL DESCRIPTION 1.560 [39.62] TYP 1.936[49.17] 1.350 [34.29] OFF O 30° 2 PLCS 1.560 [39.62] TYP LOAD (LAST) .032 [.81] TYP .220 [5.59] TYP PUSH-IN STUD M6 STUD SCREW TERMINAL WITH 30° BEND 1.250 [31.75] BACK CONNECT SCREW TERMINAL BACK CONNECT SCREW TERMINAL WITH RETAINER Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 102 www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 103 B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Front Panel Snap-in Mounting Style 5 - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Recommended panel thickness: .040 [1.02] to .100 [2.54]. 3 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 104 www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Front Panel Snap-In Mounting Style 7 - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Recommended panel thickness: .040 [1.02] to .100 [2.54]. 3 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 105 B-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL489 Listed – Ordering Scheme B F 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 24 630 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES B 2 ACTUATOR Two Color Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend 2 3 A 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers 8 TERMINAL 5 1 6 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) B 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs C 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) F 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) G 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs H & 30° bend J 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) K & 30° bend N 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Y & 30° bend 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend K G 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval Screw M5 with upturned lugs Screw M4 with upturned lugs Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) Screw M5 Back Connect Screw 10-32 Back Connect Screw M4 Back Connect Screw 8-32 Back Connect 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 7 ON-OFFDual 7 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 3 POLES 1,2 1 One 2 3 3 Three Two 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 4 0 without Aux Switch 7 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 3 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Solder Lug 9 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 21 AC Ultra Short 22 AC Short 24 AC Medium 26 AC Long S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 42 AC, Short,Hi-Inrush 44 AC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 AC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 0200.020 0250.025 0300.030 0350.035 0400.040 0450.045 0500.050 0550.055 0600.060 0650.065 0700.070 0750.075 0800.080 0850.085 0900.090 0950.095 2100.100 2150.150 106 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLEBARRIERS 9 Threaded Insert, 2 per pole A 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only)yes B ISO M3 x 5mm yes ROCKERGUARD BEZEL Threaded Insert, 2 per pole C 6-32 X 0.225 inches (multi-pole units only)yes D ISO M3 x 6.5mm yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING C 8 120/240 VAC K 120 VAC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL G UL489 Listed 3 UL489 Listed, TUV Certified Notes: 1 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 2 All poles must be same polarity. 3 3 pole units available only when 1 of 3 poles is neutral. 4 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 5 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. 6 Terminal Code 1 (Push-On) available up to 30 amps, but are not recommended over 20 amps. 7 Dual legend = ON-OFF/I-O 8 Voltage Rating available with 2 and 3-pole breakers only. 9 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL489 Listed – Ordering Scheme B 1 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 24 630 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES B 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker 5 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 6 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color 7 Vertical legend 8 Horizontal legend 2 3 A 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers 8 TERMINAL 6 1 7 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) B 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs C 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) F 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) G 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs H & 30° bend J 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) K & 30° bend N 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Y & 30° bend 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend K G 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval Screw M5 with upturned lugs Screw M4 with upturned lugs Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) Screw M5 Back Connect Screw 10-32 Back Connect Screw M4 Back Connect Screw 8-32 Back Connect 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 8 ON-OFFDual 8 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 3 POLES 2,3 1 One 2 3 4 Three Two 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 4 0 without Aux Switch 7 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 3 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Solder Lug 9 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 21 AC Ultra Short 22 AC Short 24 AC Medium 26 AC Long S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 42 AC, Short,Hi-Inrush 44 AC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 AC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 0200.020 0250.025 0300.030 0350.035 0400.040 0450.045 0500.050 0550.055 0600.060 0650.065 0700.070 0750.075 0800.080 0850.085 0900.090 0950.095 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 www.carlingtech.com 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 9 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL BARRIERS 12 Threaded Insert, 2 per pole FLAT ROCKER ACTUATOR A 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only)yes B ISO M3 x 5mm yes RECESSED OFF SIDE ROCKER ACTUATOR 10 E 6-32 X 0.225 inches (multi-pole units only)yes F ISO M3 x 6.5mm yes PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL,Threaded Insert, 2 per pole C 6-32 x 0.195 inches yes D ISO M3 x 5mm yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING C 11 120/240 VAC K 120 VAC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL G UL489 Listed 3 UL489 Listed, TUV Certified Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 3 All poles must be same polarity. 4 3 pole units available only when1 of 3 poles is neutral. 5 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. 7 Terminal Code 1 (Push-On) available up to 30 amps, but are not recommended over 20 amps. 8 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black, Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend. 9 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes 7 & 8. Legend on Push-To-Reset bezel/shroud matches Visi-Color of rocker with actuator codes 5 & 6. 10 Recessed “off-side” available with actuator codes 1, 2, 3 & 4. Legends on rocker are available in ink stamping only. 11 Voltage rating available with 2 & 3-pole breakers only. 12 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. 107 B-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL489 Listed - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Dimensions apply to all variations shown. Notice that circuit breaker line & load terminal orientation on indicate “OFF” is opposite of indicate “ON”. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 4 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 108 www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL489 Listed - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 Tolerance ±.010 [.25] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 109 B-Series Circuit Breaker - PC Terminal Diagrams PC Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 Tolerance ±.010 [.25] unless otherwise specified. 110 www.carlingtech.com C-Series C-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction C-Series CIRCUIT BREAKER The C-Series hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers are ideal for applications that require higher amperage and voltage handling capability in a smaller package. They are available in 1-6 poles, 0.02-100amps, UL Recognized up to 480VAC or 150VDC, UL489 Listed up to 240VAC or 125VDC, with choice of time delays, terminal options, actuator styles and colors. The C-Series employs a unique arc chute design which allows for higher interrupting capacities of up to 10,000 amps. New thermoset glass filled polyester half shell construction provides for increased mechanical and electrical strength. The wiping contacts, mechanical linkage with two step actuation, clean contacts providing high, positive contact pressure and longer contact life. Available with American Standard or Metric Threaded Stud terminals , or Saddle Clamp screw terminals. The optional mid-trip handle style actuator allows a visual indication of electrical overload with or without alarm feature. Product Highlights: Extensive list of Agency Approvals Available with Standard or Metric Stud terminals, or Saddle Clamp screw terminals Optional mid-trip handle style actuator Unique arc chute design which allows for higher interrupting capacities of up to 10,000 amps Exclusive Rockerguard and Push-To-Reset bezel Available with new solid color and two-color Visirocker® actuators New thermoset glass filled polyester half shell construction Only Marine applicable ordering schemes and drawings are shown in this catalog. For complete product details, please visit www.carlingtech.com www.carlingtech.com 111 C-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Maximum Voltage AC, 480 WYE/277 VAC, 50/60 Hz (see Table A.) UL489: AC,240 VAC. (See Table D), 50/60 Hz, 125 VDC Current Rating Standard current coils: 0.100, 0.250, 0.500, 0.750, 1.00, 2.50, 5.00, 7.50, 10.0, 15.0, 25.0, 30.0, 35.0, 40.0, 50.0, 60.0, 70.0, 80.0, 90.0 and 100 amps. Other ratings available, see Ordering Scheme. Standard Voltage Coils DC - 6V, 12V; AC - 120V; other ratings available, see Ordering Scheme. Auxiliary Switch Rating SPDT; 10.1 amps-250VAC, DC Aux. Switch 1.0A, 65 VDC. 0.5A, 80VDC,1/4 HP, 125VAC,VDE & TUV 1.0 125 VAC. Insulation Resistance Minimum of 100 Megohms at 500 VDC. Dielectric Strength UL, CSA: 1960 V 50/60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals. C-Series Circuit Breakers comply with the 8mm spacing and 3750V 50/60 Hz dielectric requirements from hazardous voltage to operator accessible surfaces, between adjacent poles and from main circuits to auxiliary circuits per Publications EN 60950 and VDE 0805. Resistance, Impedance Values from Line to Load Terminal based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker. Mechanical Endurance 10,000 ON-OFF operations @ 6 per minute; with rated current & voltage. Trip Free All C-Series circuit breakers will trip on overload, even when actuator is forcibly held in the ON position. Trip Indication The operating actuator moves positively to the OFF position when an overload causes the breaker to trip. With mid-trip, handle moves to the mid position on electrical trip of the circuit breaker. With mid trip handle with alarm switch, handle moves to the mid position and the alarm switch actuates when the circuit breaker is electrically tripped. Physical Number of Poles Internal Circuit Config. Weight Standard Colors 1-6 poles ≤ 50A; 1-4 poles @ 5170A; 1-2 poles 71-100A. UL489 Handle: 1 pole ≤ 100A, 2 pole ≤ 50A; Rocker: 1 pole ≤ 100A. Series (with or without auxiliary switch, mid trip & mid trip with alarm switch) Shunt & Relay with current or voltage trip coils, Dual Coil, Switch Only (with or without aux. switch). UL489: Series (with or without auxiliary switch, mid-trip & midtrip with alarm switch). Approx.112 grams/pole ( 3.95 oz). Housing: Black RESISTANCE, IMPEDANCE VALUES from Line to Load Terminals (Values Based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker ) 1000 CURRENT TOLERANCE (AMPS) (%) 0.10 - 5.0 5.1 - 20.0 15 25 20.1 - 50.0 35 100 10 O H M S 1 60 Hz 1/2 Cycle Inrush Pulse Tolerance 0.1 Multiple of Rated Current Ir 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 Time Delay Curves 42, 44 & 46 (50 Amps Max.) 25x Time Delay Curves 22, 24 (100 Amps Max.) 26 (70 Amps Max.) 12x 100 t AMPERE RATING 4.165 8.33 16.67 Pulse Tolerance Curves CURRENT (AMPS) TOLERANCE (%) 0.100 - 5.0 15% 60 Hz5.1 1/2- 20.0 Cycle 20.1 -Tolerance 100 Inrush Pulse 25% 35% Ir FIGURE Time Delay Curves 1 Multiple of Rated Current Multiple of Rated Current Ir 42, 44 & 46 (50 Amps Max.) 25x Time Delay Curves 22, 24 (100 Amps Max.) 26 (70 Amps Max.) 12x Time Delay Curves 42, 44 & 46 (50 Amps Max.) 22x Time Delay Curves 22, 24 (100 Amps Max.) 26 (70 Amps Max.) 10x t t 4.165 Ir Multiple of Rated Current 50 Hz 1/2 Cycle Inrush Pulse Tolerance 8.33 5.0 10.0 16.67 50 Hz 1/2 Cycle Inrush Pulse Tolerance Time Delay Curves 42, 44 & 46 (50 Amps Max.) 22x Time Delay Curves 22, 24 (100 Amps Max.) 26 (70 Amps Max.) 10x 20.0 Time in Milliseconds Environmental Designed and tested in accordance with requirements of specification MIL-PRF-55629 & MIL-STD-202 as follows: Shock Withstands 100 Gs, 6ms sawtooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Test Condition “I”. Instantaneous and ultrashort curves tested @ 90% of rated current. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz & 10 Gs 55-500 Hz, @ rated current per Method 204C, Test Cond. A. Instantaneous & ultrashort curves tested @ 90% of rated current. Moisture Resistance Method 106D, i.e., ten 24-hour cycles @ +25°C to +65°C, 80-98% RH. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90-95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs). Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C). Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C t 5.0 10.0 20.0 *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. Time in Milliseconds 112 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: Lists UL Recognized & CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector C-SERIES TABLE A: COMPONENT SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTORS VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION SERIES CURRENT RATING FREQUENCY PHASE FULL LOAD AMPS 32 DC --- 0.02 - 100 --- --- 48 DC --- 110 - 150 --- --- 65 DC --- 0.02 - 70 --- 80 DC --- 80 DC --- 125 DC 125 / 250 250 NOTES UL CSA 5000 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 5000 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 --- 5000 TC1,2, OL1,U1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 --- 71 -100 --- 5000 TC1,2, OL0,U1 TC1,2, OL0,U1 0.02 - 70 --- --- 7500 TC1,2, OL1,U1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 --- 71 -100 --- 7500 TC1,2, OL0,U1 TC1,2, OL0,U1 0.02 - 70 --- --- 10,000 TC1,2, OL1,U1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" --- 71 -100 --- 10,000 TC1,2, OL0,U1 TC1,2, OL0,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" --- 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 DC --- 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" DC --- 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L". 2 Pole Break Required for 250 Volts 0.02 - 100 --- --- 3000 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 Per Pole Rating 0.02 - 100 --- --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" Must Have Agency Code "L" 50 / 60 1 150 DC --- --- 80 - 100 --- 5000 TC1, OL0, U3 --- Must Have Agency Code "L" 150 DC --- --- 101 - 175 --- 5000 TC1, OL0, U3 --- Must Have Agency Code "L" Parallel Pole 0.02 - 100 --- --- 3500 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 125 / 250 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 51 - 100 --- --- 1000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase 0.02 - 100 --- --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U2 TC1,2,OL1,U2 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase, "L" Agency Code 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3500 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 Per Pole Rating 0.02 - 100 --- --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" 51 - 70 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 --- 0.02 - 100 --- 3000 TC1, OL0, U2 TC1, OL0, U2 0.02 - 70 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 3 poles breaking 3 phase --- 0.02 - 90 --- 5000 TC1,2,OL0,U1 TC1,2,OL0,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 0.02 - 30 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 --- 31 - 50 5000 --- TC1,2,OL0,C1 TC1,2,OL0,C1 50 / 60 3 277 50 / 60 1 480 / 277 50 / 60 3 480 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 30 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 --- 31 - 50 5000 --- TC1,2,OL0,C1 TC1,2,OL0,C1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase 3 poles breaking 3 phase 2 poles breaking 1 phase 80 DC --- 0.02 - 50 --- --- 7500 TC1,2, OL1,U1 125 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3000 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 Per Pole Rating 125 / 250 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3500 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3500 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 250 50 / 60 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3000 TC1, OL0, U2 TC1, OL0, U2 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 DUAL COIL SWITCH ONLY APPLICATION CODES 125 250 RELAY UL/CSA WITH BACKUP WITHOUT BACKUP GENERAL PURPOSE AMPS FUSE FUSE 1 MAX. RATING 1 SHUNT SHORT CIRCUIT CAPACITY (AMPS) 1 3 277 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 80 DC --- 0.02 - 50 --- --- 7500 TC1,2, OL1,U1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 Per Pole Rating 3 poles breaking 3 phase 277 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 250 50 / 60 3 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 3 poles breaking 3 phase 480 / 277 50 / 60 3 0.02 - 30 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 3 poles breaking 3 phase TC1,2,OL0,C1 480 50 / 60 1 --- 31 - 50 5000 --- TC1,2,OL0,C1 0.02 - 30 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 --- 31 - 50 5000 --- TC1,2,OL0,C1 TC1,2,OL0,C1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 80 DC --- 0.02 - 50 --- --- 7500 TC1,2, OL1,U1 277 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 250 50 / 60 3 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 65 DC --- 0.02 - 70 --- --- --- --- --- 80 DC --- 125 50 / 60 125 / 250 50 / 60 250 50 / 60 277 50 / 60 480 / 277 50 / 60 --- 71 -100 --- --- --- --- 0.02 - 70 --- --- --- --- --- --- 71 -100 --- --- --- --- 1 0.02 - 100 --- --- --- --- --- 1 0.02 - 100 --- --- --- --- --- 1 0.02 - 100 --- --- --- --- --- 3 0.02 - 70 --- --- --- --- --- 1 0.02 - 50 --- --- --- --- --- 0.02 - 30 --- --- --- --- --- --- 31 - 50 --- --- --- --- 3 2 poles breaking 1 phase 3 poles breaking 3 phase 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase 3 poles breaking 3 phase Notes: 1. Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse rated 15A minimum and no more than 4 times full load amps not to exceed 125A for 50 Amp or less rating and not to exceed 175 for 51 through 100 Amp rating www.carlingtech.com 113 C-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table B: Lists UL Recognized and CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as a Manual Motor Controller. RELAY Notes: 1 UL recognized and CSA Accepted at 480V refers to 3 & 4 pole versions used in a 3Ø, wye connected circuit or 2-pole version connected with 2 poles breaking. 1Ø and backed up with series fusing as stated above in note 1. * Series, Shunt and Relay Trip - Voltage Coil Construction not current coils Table C: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted, VDE and TUV Certified configurations and performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. Notes: 1. General Purpose ratings for UL/CSA only. 2. Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse rated 15A minimum and no more than 4 times full load amps not to exceed 125A for 50 Amp or less rating and not to exceed 175 for 51 through 100 Amp rating. Table D: Lists UL Listed (489), CSA Certified (C22.2 No. 5.1-M) configuration and performance capabilities as a Molded Case Circuit Breaker. C SERIES TABLE D : UL489 LISTED BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION SERIES DUAL COIL INTERRUPTING CAPACITY (AMPS) WITHOUT FULL LOAD BACKUP FUSE AMPS CURRENT RATING VOLTAGE CONSTRUCTION NOTES MAX. RATING FREQUENCY PHASE 80 DC --- 0.10 - 100 125 DC --- 0.10 - 100 5,000 1 - 3 Poles 125 / 250 DC --- 0.10 - 50 5,000 1 or 2 Poles (2 Poles Required for 250 Volts) 120 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 50 10,000 1 - 3 Poles 51 - 70 5,000 1 - 3 Poles 0.10 - 50 5,000 2 or 3 Poles. 1 Pole of a 3 Pole Unit is Neutral 50,000 1 Limited to 2 Poles Max from 71 - 100 Amps. 10,000 Limited to 2 Poles Max from 71 - 100 Amps. 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 50 10000 1 2 or 3 Poles. 1 Pole of a 3 Pole Unit is Neutral 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 1Pole 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 20 5,000 2 Pole 277 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 20 10,000 1Pole 120 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 10,000 --- Notes from Table D: 1. Special catalog number required. Consult factory. 114 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table E: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical and Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596). Ignition Protected per UL 1500. UL Classified Small Craft Electrical Devices, Marine in accordance with ISO 8846 (Guide UZMK, File MQ1515) as Marine Supplementary Protectors. Table F: Lists UL Listed configurations and performance capabilities as Circuit Breakers for use in Communications Equipment (Guide DITT, File E189195), under UL489A. Agency Certifications UL Recognized UL Standard 1077 Component Recognition Program as Protectors Supplementary (Guide CCN/QVNU2, File E75596) CSA Accepted Component Supplementary Protector under Class 3215 30, FIle 047848 0 000 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 235 UL Standard 508 Switches, Industrial Control (Guide CCN/NRNT2, File E148683) CSA Certified UL Standard 1500 Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical & Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596) Ignition Protection Circuit Breaker Model Case (Class 1432 01, File 093910), CSA Standard C22.2 No. 5.1 - M TUV Certified EN60934, under License No. R72040875 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, (Guide DIVQ, File E129899) VDE Certified EN60934, VDE 0642 under File No. 10537 UL Listed UL Standard 489 UL Standard 489A www.carlingtech.com Communications Equipment (Guide CCN/DITT, File E189195) 115 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme C A 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 10 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 6 Frequency & Delay 1 SERIES C 9 Actuator Color C 10 Mounting Bezel/Barrier 11 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES Handle, one per pole Handle, one per multipole unit Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 Two 1 2 1 8 Terminal 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 2 ACTUATOR 1 A B S T 450 7 Current Rating 3 4 Three Four 4 CIRCUIT 3 A 3 Switch Only (No Coil) B Series Trip (Current) C Series Trip (Voltage) 4 D Shunt Trip (Current) 4 E Shunt Trip (Voltage) 5 6 Five Six F 4 Relay Trip (Current) G 4 Relay Trip (Voltage) H 4,5 Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil K 4,5 Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 0200.020 2350.350 4303.000 0250.025 2400.400 4353.500 0300.030 2450.450 4404.000 0350.035 2500.500 4454.500 0400.040 2550.550 4505.000 0450.045 2600.600 4555.500 0500.050 2650.650 4606.000 0550.055 2700.700 4656.500 0600.060 2750.750 4707.000 0650.065 2800.800 4757.500 0700.070 2850.850 4808.000 0750.075 2900.900 4858.500 0800.080 2950.950 4909.000 0850.085 4101.000 4959.500 0900.090 5121.250 610 10.000 0950.095 4151.500 71010.500 2100.100 517 1.750 611 11.000 2150.150 4202.000 71111.500 2200.200 5222.250 61212.000 2250.250 4252.500 71212.500 2300.300 5272.750 61313.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 7 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 960.000 670 970.000 680 980.000 685 985.000 690 990.000 695 995.000 810 9100.00 A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC CODEAMPERES 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 3 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 7 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 7 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 6 8 9 30 31 32 34 36 42 8 44 8 46 8 52 8 54 8 56 S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. DC 50/60Hz Instantaneous DC 50/60Hz Ultra Short DC 50/60Hz Short DC 50/60Hz Medium DC 50/60Hz Long 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided assembled with multi-pole units. B: Handle location as viewed from front of breaker: 2 pole - left pole 3 pole - center pole 4 pole - two handles at center poles 5 pole - three handles at center poles 6 pole - four handles at center poles S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B, C, D, E, F, G, H and K. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B & C. 2 Standard multipole units have all poles identical except when specifying auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles. 4 pole max with VDE. 5th pole available as Series Trip with Voltage Coil only. 3 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 6 poles, and only available with VDE Certification when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.). For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. For 55-70 amps, select Current Code 670. For 75-100 amps, select Current Code 810. 4 Circuit Codes D,E,F,G,H & K available with Terminal Codes 1,2,4 & 5 only. Circuit Codes D, F, H & K available up to 50 amps maximum Current Rating. 5 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. Dual Coil Voltage Coils with Shunt Trip Construction trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual Coil Voltage Coils require 30VA minimum power to trip instantaneously and are rated for intermittent duty only. 6 Auxiliary Switch available with Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 7 Voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 & 20. 8 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only, and up to 50 amps maximum. 9 Current Ratings 60 - 70 are available up to four poles maximum. Ratings 71 - 100 are available up to two poles maximum. 10 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 11 Terminal Codes 2, 4, 5 and C available to 50 amps maximum. 12 Terminal Codes 3, 6 & 9 available to 100 amps maximum. 13 Terminal Code 7 available to 25 amps maximum. 14 Terminal Code A available to 100 amps maximum. 15 Terminal Codes 7, 9 & C are not VDE approved. 16 No marking available. Consult factory. VDE/TUV Approval requires dual (I-O, ON-OFF) or I-O markings on all handles. 17 Single pole only. 18 VDE/TUV: 30 amps max.; UL/CSA: 50 amps max.; Available in 2 - 4 poles only and limited to AC Delays. “General Purpose amps” not rated for “full load amps” or to be used in applications with a motor. 116 A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC 8 TERMINAL 15 1 10 Stud 10-32 2 11 Screw 10-32 3 12 Stud 1/4-20 4 11 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 11 Screw M5 x 0.8 J12 J18 J24 J48 6 12 7 13,15 9 15 A 14 C 11,15 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC Stud M6 0.250 Double Click Connect 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 16 Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White AB 1Black Black CD 2White Red FG 3White Green HJ 4White Blue KL 5White Yellow MN 6Black Gray PQ 7Black Orange RS 8Black Black (short handle)17 TU 9 White 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE BARRIERS Threaded Insert 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 X 0.195 inches yes 18 C 6-32 X 0.195 inches yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm yes D 18 ISO M3 x 5mm yes Front panel Snap-In, 1.00” [25.4mm] wide bezel 17 E with Handleguard no VOLTAGE < 300 < 300 ≥ 300 < 300 < 300 ≥ 300 < 300 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized, CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized, CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized, CSA Accepted H UL489 Construction: VDE Certified, UL Recognized, CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), CSA Accepted L UL489 Construction: UL Recognized, CSA Accepted R UL489 Construction: TUV Certified, UL Recognized, CSA Accepted www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL489 Listed – Ordering Scheme C A 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 14 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 6 Frequency & Delay 1 SERIES C 7 Current Rating 1 2 1 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers K G 11 Max. App. Rating 12 Agency Approval 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 A Handle, one per pole B Handle, one per multipole unit S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 POLES 2 1 One 450 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 3 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 6 8 9 S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 26 42 4 44 4 46 4 52 4 54 4 56 4 50/60Hz Long 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided assembled with multi-pole units. B: Handle located, as viewed from front of breaker in left pole. 2 pole maximum. S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. 2 Standard multipole units have all poles identical except when specifying auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles. 2 & 3 pole circuit breakers required for 120/240 VAC (Maximum application rating code C) applications, have all poles identical except when specifying auxiliary / alarm switch which is normally supplied in extreme right pole per figure B. Terminal barriers are required on all multipole breakers. Third pole is for 120/240 VAC applications requiring neutral disconnect. The 3rd pole has the same construction as poles 1 & 2. 3 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary. switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. VDE approval on auxiliary switch codes 2, 3 & 4 only. Auxiliary / Alarm Switch with Independent Circuit ie: separate from breaker circuit, only available with circuit breakers rated 50 amp maximum at 80 VDC, 125 VDC, and 120 VAC. Auxiliary / Alarm Switch with Dependent Circuit ie: same as circuit breaker, is supplied from factory with common terminal of auxiliary / alarm switch connected to line terminal on 120/240 and 240 VAC ratings. Circuit breakers rated 120 VAC 50 amp maximum can be supplied with Auxiliary/Alarm switch common terminal connected to breaker line terminal. Consult factory for special catalog number. 4 Available up to 50 amps maximum. 5 Current ratings 71 - 100 with VDE approvals are available up to two poles maximum. 6 Terminal Codes 9 & C are not VDE approved. 7 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 8 Terminal Codes 2, 4, 5 & C available to 50 amps maximum. 9 Terminal Codes 3, 6 & 9 available to 100 amps maximum. 10 Terminal Code A available to 100 amps maximum. 11 VDE and TUV approvals require Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) markings on all handles. 12 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. www.carlingtech.com 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 4252.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 8 TERMINAL 6 1 7 Stud 10-32 2 8 Screw 10-32 3 9 Stud 1/4-20 4 8 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 8 Screw M5 x 0.8 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 6 9 9 9 A 10 C 8 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 66060.000 67070.000 68080.000 68585.000 69090.000 69595.000 810100.00 Stud M6 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 11 Actuator Color ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White B1Black Black D2White Red G3White Green J4White Blue L5White Yellow N6Black Gray Q7Black Orange S8Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE Threaded Insert 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 ISO M3 x 5mm BARRIERS 12 yes yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING A 65 DC B 125 DC C 120/240 AC 2 D 240 AC K 120 AC F 277 AC M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL 11 A without approvals F UL489 Listed, CSA Certified & VDE Certified G UL489 Listed & CSA Certified J UL489 Listed, CSA Certified & TUV Certified 117 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Sealed Toggle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme C M 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 10 6 Frequency & Delay Sealed Toggle, one per pole 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT A 2 Switch Only (no coil) B Series Trip (current) C Series Trip (voltage) D 3 Shunt Trip (current) E 3 Shunt Trip (voltage) F 3 G 3 H 3,4 K 3,4 Relay Trip (current) Relay Trip (voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 8 9 S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 2 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 6 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 6 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 31 32 34 36 42 7 44 7 46 7 52 7 54 7 56 DC 50/60Hz Instantaneous DC 50/60Hz Ultra Short DC 50/60Hz Short DC 50/60Hz Medium DC 50/60Hz Long 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Actuator Code M: Handle location as viewed from front of breaker: 2 pole - right pole 3 pole - center pole 2 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 3 poles, and only available with VDE. For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. For 55-70 amps, select Current Code 670. For 75-100 amps, select Current Code 810. 3 Circuit Codes D,E,F,G,H & K available with Terminal Codes 1,2,4 & 5 only. 4 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. Dual Coil Voltage Coils with Shunt Trip Construction trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual Coil Voltage Coils require 30VA minimum power to trip instantaneously and are rated for intermittent duty only. 5 Auxiliary Switch available with Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 & 20. 7 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only, and up to 50 amps maximum. 8 Consult factory for current ratings 71-100, in three pole units, available as special catalog number only. 9 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 10 Terminal Codes 2, 4, 5 and C available to 50 amps maximum. 11 Terminal Codes 3, 6 & 9 available to 100 amps maximum. 12 Terminal Code 7 available to 25 amps maximum. 13 Terminal Code A available to 100 amps maximum. 118 9 Legend Plate C 10 Mounting Bezel/Barrier 11 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 3 POLES 1 One 1 0 1 8 Terminal 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 9 1 SERIES C M 450 7 Current Rating 0200.020 2350.350 4303.000 0250.025 2400.400 4353.500 0300.030 2450.450 4404.000 0350.035 2500.500 4454.500 0400.040 2550.550 4505.000 0450.045 2600.600 4555.500 0500.050 2650.650 4606.000 0550.055 2700.700 4656.500 0600.060 2750.750 4707.000 0650.065 2800.800 4757.500 0700.070 2850.850 4808.000 0750.075 2900.900 4858.500 0800.080 2950.950 4909.000 0850.085 4101.000 4959.500 0900.090 5121.250 610 10.000 0950.095 4151.500 71010.500 2100.100 517 1.750 611 11.000 2150.150 4202.000 71111.500 2200.200 5222.250 61212.000 2250.250 4252.500 71212.500 2300.300 5272.750 61313.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 7 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 960.000 670 970.000 680 980.000 685 985.000 690 990.000 695 995.000 810 9100.00 A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC CODEAMPERES A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC 8 TERMINAL 1 9 Stud 10-32 2 10 Screw 10-32 11 3 Stud 1/4-20 4 10 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 10 Screw M5 x 0.8 J12 J18 J24 J48 6 11 7 12 9 11 A 13 C 10 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC Stud M6 0.250 Double Click Connect 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 LEGEND PLATE 0 No Legend 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE 1 Standard Hex Nut A Standard Hex Nut (multi-pole units only) BARRIERS no yes 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized & CSA Accepted, UL1500 ignition protection L UL Recognized & CSA Accepted with listed construction www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme C C 3 1 Series 2 Actuator 14 B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 450 6 Frequency & Delay 1 SERIES C 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers D 11 Agency Approval 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend E Indicate ON, no legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend H Indicate OFF, no legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker N Indicate OFF,vertical legend O Indicate OFF,horizontal legend P Indicate OFF,no legend Single color J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend L No legend Push-To-Reset, Single color R Vertical legend U Horizontal legend V No legend 3 POLES 2 1 One 1 2 1 7 Current Rating 2 3 4 CIRCUIT F 4 A 3 Switch Only (No Coil) G 4 B Series Trip (Current) H 4,5 C Series Trip (Voltage) 4 D Shunt Trip (Current) K 4,5 E 4 Shunt Trip (Voltage) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 7 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 7 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 6 8 9 Three Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 30 31 32 34 36 42 8 44 8 46 8 52 8 54 8 56 8 DC 50/60Hz Instantaneous DC 50/60Hz Ultra Short DC 50/60Hz Short DC 50/60Hz Medium DC 50/60Hz Long 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all poles identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. Rocker location as viewed from front panel: 2 pole – left pole; 3 pole – center pole. 3 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 3 poles, and only available with VDE Certification when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.), For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. For 55-70 amps, select Current Code 670. For 75-100 amps, select Current Code 810. 4 Circuit Codes D,E,F,G,H & K available with Terminal Codes 1,2,4 & 5 only. Circuit Codes D,F,H & K available up to 50 amps maximum Current Rating. 5 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. Dual Coil Voltage Coils with Shunt Trip Construction trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual Coil Voltage Coils require 30VA minimum power to trip instantaneously and are rated for intermittent duty only. 6 Auxiliary Switch available with Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. Auxiliary switch codes 2, 3 & 4 are VDE approved. 7 Voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 & 20. 8 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only, and up to 50 amps maximum. 9 Current Ratings 60-70 are available up to four poles maximum. Ratings 71-100 are available up to two poles maximum. 10 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 11 Terminal Codes 2,4,5 & C available to 50 amps maximum. 12 Terminal Codes 3,6 & 9 available to 100 amps maximum. 13 Terminal Code 7 available to 25 amps maximum. 14 Terminal Code A available to 100 amps maximum. 15 Terminal Codes 7, 9 & C are not VDE approved. 16 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black 17 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white when single color rocker is ordered. Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend with actuator codes C - G, and J, K, N, O, R, & U. None = no legend with actuator codes H, L, P, V. Rockerguard available with actuator codes C - L. Push-to-reset available with actuator codes N, O, P, R, U, V. 18 VDE/TUV approval requires Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) or I-O markings on rocker. 19 VDE/TUV: 30 amps max.; UL/CSA: 50 amps max.; Available in 2 - 4 poles only and limited to AC Delays. “General Purpose amps” not rated for “full load amps” or to be used in applications with a motor. www.carlingtech.com 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 960.000 670 970.000 680 980.000 685 985.000 690 990.000 695 995.000 810 9100.00 A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC CODEAMPERES Two 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 6 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 0200.020 2350.350 4303.000 0250.025 2400.400 4353.500 0300.030 2450.450 4404.000 0350.035 2500.500 4454.500 0400.040 2550.550 4505.000 0450.045 2600.600 4555.500 0500.050 2650.650 4606.000 0550.055 2700.700 4656.500 0600.060 2750.750 4707.000 0650.065 2800.800 4757.500 0700.070 2850.850 4808.000 0750.075 2900.900 4858.500 0800.080 2950.950 4909.000 0850.085 4101.000 4959.500 0900.090 5121.250 610 10.000 0950.095 4151.500 71010.500 2100.100 517 1.750 611 11.000 2150.150 4202.000 71111.500 2200.200 5222.250 61212.000 2250.250 4252.500 71212.500 2300.300 5272.750 61313.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 7 A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC 8 TERMINAL 1 10 Stud 10-32 2 11 Screw 10-32 3 12 Stud 1/4-20 4 11 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 11 Screw M5 x 0.8 J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC 6 12 Stud M6 7 13 0.250 Double Quick Connect 9 7/16” Clip Terminal A 14 Plug-In Stud C 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 16,17,18 Actuator or Visi-Color Marking: Marking Color: Single Color Color: I-O ON-OFF Dual/None Rocker/Handle Visi-Rocker White A B 1 Black White Black C D 2 White n/a Red F G 3 White Red Green H J 4 White Green Blue K L 5 White Blue Yellow M N 6 Black Yellow Gray P Q 7 Black Gray Orange R S 8 Black Orange 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 1 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 6-32 x 0.195 inches 3 19 6-32 x 0.195 inches 4 ISO M3 x 5mm 5 ISO M3 x 5mm 19 6 ISO M3 x 5mm ROCKERGUARD BEZEL A 6-32 x 0.195 inches C 6-32 x 0.195 inches 19 E 6-32 x 0.195 inches G ISO M3 x 5mm J ISO M3 x 5mm L 19 ISO M3 x 5mm PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL B 6-32 x 0.195 inches D 6-32 x 0.195 inches 19 F 6-32 x 0.195 inches H ISO M3 x 5mm J ISO M3 x 5mm M 19 ISO M3 x 5mm BARRIERSVOLTAGE no <300 yes <300 yes ≥300 no <300 yes <300 yes ≥300 no yes yes no yes yes <300 <300 ≥300 <300 <300 ≥300 no yes yes no yes yes <300 <300 ≥300 <300 <300 ≥300 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted H UL489 Construction: VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted L UL489 Construction: UL Recognized & CSA Accepted R UL489 Construction: TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted 119 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL Listed – Ordering Scheme C C 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 14 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 6 Frequency & Delay 450 7 Current Rating Two Color Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 Single color J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend ROCKER STYLE DESCRIPTIONS INDICATE "ON" VERTICAL STYLE INDICATE "OFF" SINGLE COLOR CODE "F" CODE "J" CODE "C" INDICATE COLOR LOCATION HORIZONTAL STYLE K G 10 Mounting/ Barriers 11 Max. App. Rating 12 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 LINE LINE CODE "G" CODE "K" LINE 2 8 TERMINAL 1 5 Stud 10-32 2 6 Screw 10-32 with saddle & washer clamps 3 7 Stud 1/4-20 4 6 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 6 Screw M5 x 0.8 with saddle & washer clamps LINE Two 3 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 60.000 670 70.000 680 80.000 685 85.000 690 90.000 695 95.000 810 100.00 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 2 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 8 9 S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 42 8 44 8 46 8 52 8 54 8 56 6 7 9 7,8 A 7,8 C 6,8 Stud M6 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal Three 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (current) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 4252.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 LINE CODE "D" 3 POLES 1 1 One 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 2 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 3 Available up to 50 amps maximum. 4 Current ratings 71 - 100 with VDE approvals are available up to two poles maximum. 5 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 6 Terminal Codes 2, 4, 5 & C available to 50 amps maximum. 7 Terminal Codes 3, 6, 9 & A available to 100 amps maximum. 8 Terminal Codes 9 & C are not VDE approved. 9 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black 10 Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend on actuator. 11 VDE and TUV approval requires Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) markings on rocker. 12 Rockerguard available with all actuator codes. 13 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. 14 2 & 3 pole circuit breakers required for 120/240 AC rating. 120 9 Actuator Color 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 4 1 SERIES C LINE 1 2 A 8 Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 11 Actuator or Visi-Color Marking: Marking Color: Single Color 10 Color: ON-OFF Dual Rocker/Handle White B 1 Black Black D 2 White Red G 3 White Green J 4 White Blue L 5 White Yellow N 6 Black Gray Q7 Black Orange S 8 Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 12 Standard Rocker Bezel Threaded Insert, 2 per pole A 6-32 X 0.195 inches C ISO M3 x 5mm Rockerguard Bezel Threaded Insert, 2 per pole B 6-32 x 0.195 inches D ISO M3 x 5mm Visi-Rocker White n/a Red Green Blue Yellow Gray Orange BARRIERS 13 yes yes yes yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING A 65 DC B 125 DC C 120/240 AC 14 D 240 AC F 277 AC K 120 AC M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL A without approvals F UL 489 Listed, CSA Certified, & VDE Certified G UL 489 Listed & CSA Certified J UL489 Listed, CSA Certified & TUV Certified www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme C 1 2 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 10 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers E 11 Agency Approval 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 9 1 SERIES C CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker 5 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 6 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color 7 Vertical legend 8 Horizontal legend 3 POLES 2 1 One 1 2 1 8 Terminal 2 Two 3 4 CIRCUIT F 4 A 3 Switch Only (No Coil) G 4 B Series Trip (Current) H 4,5 C Series Trip (Voltage) D 4 Shunt Trip (Current) K 4,5 E 4 Shunt Trip (Voltage) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 6 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 7 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 7 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 6 8 9 Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 30 31 32 34 36 42 8 44 8 46 8 52 8 54 8 56 8 DC 50/60Hz Instantaneous DC 50/60Hz Ultra Short DC 50/60Hz Short DC 50/60Hz Medium DC 50/60Hz Long 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Push-to-reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all poles identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. Rocker location as viewed from front panel: 2 pole – left pole; 3 pole – center pole. 3 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 3 poles, and only available with VDE Certification when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.). For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. For 55-70 amps, select Current Code 670. For 75-100 amps, select Current Code 810. 4 Circuit Codes D,E,F,G,H & K available with Terminal Codes 1,2,4 & 5 only. Circuit Codes D,F,H & K available up to 50 amps maximum Current Rating. 5 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. Dual Coil Voltage Coils with Shunt Trip Construction trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual Coil Voltage Coils require 30VA minimum power to trip instantaneously and are rated for intermittent duty only. 6 Auxiliary Switch available with Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. Auxilary switch codes 2, 3 & 4 are VDE approved. 7 Voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 and 20. 8 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only, and up to 50 amps maximum. 9 Current ratings 60-70 are available up to four poles maximum. Current ratings 71 - 100 are available up to two poles maximum. 10 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 11 Terminal Codes 2,4,5 & C available to 50 amps maximum. 12 Terminal Codes 3,6 & 9 available to 100 amps maximum. 13 Terminal Code 7 available to 25 amps maximum. 14 Terminal Code A available to 100 amps maximum. 15 Terminal Codes 7, 9 & C are not VDE approved. 16 Color shown is visi & legend with remainder of rocker black. Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend. 17 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes 7 & 8. Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud matches visi-color of rocker with actuator codes 5 & 6. 18 VDE/TUV approval requires Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) or I-O markings on rocker. 19 VDE/TUV: 30 amps max.; UL/CSA: 50 amps max.; Available in 2 & 3 poles only and limited to AC Delays. “General Purpose amps” not rated for “full load amps” or to be used in applications with a motor. 20 Recessed “OFF SIDE” available with actuator codes 1,2,3&4. Legends on rocker are available in ink stamping only. www.carlingtech.com 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 960.000 670 970.000 680 980.000 685 985.000 690 990.000 695 995.000 810 9100.00 A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC CODEAMPERES Three S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 0200.020 2350.350 4303.000 0250.025 2400.400 4353.500 0300.030 2450.450 4404.000 0350.035 2500.500 4454.500 0400.040 2550.550 4505.000 0450.045 2600.600 4555.500 0500.050 2650.650 4606.000 0550.055 2700.700 4656.500 0600.060 2750.750 4707.000 0650.065 2800.800 4757.500 0700.070 2850.850 4808.000 0750.075 2900.900 4858.500 0800.080 2950.950 4909.000 0850.085 4101.000 4959.500 0900.090 5121.250 610 10.000 0950.095 4151.500 71010.500 2100.100 517 1.750 611 11.000 2150.150 4202.000 71111.500 2200.200 5222.250 61212.000 2250.250 4252.500 71212.500 2300.300 5272.750 61313.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 7 A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC 8 TERMINAL 1 10 Stud 10-32 2 11 Screw 10-32 3 12 Stud 1/4-20 4 11 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 11 Screw M5 x 0.8 J12 J18 J24 J48 6 12 7 13 9 15 A 14 C 15 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC Stud M6 0.250 Double Quick Connect 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 16,17,18 Actuator or Visi-Color Marking: Marking Color: Single Color Color: I-O ON-OFF Dual/None Rocker/Handle Visi-Rocker White A B 1 Black White Black C D 2 White n/a Red F G 3 White Red Green H J 4 White Green Blue K L 5 White Blue Yellow M N 6 Black Yellow Gray P Q 7 Black Gray Orange R S 8 Black Orange 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 1 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 6-32 x 0.195 inches 19 3 6-32 x 0.195 inches 4 ISO M3 x 5mm 5 ISO M3 x 5mm 19 6 ISO M3 x 5mm RECESSED OFF ROCKER 7 6-32 x 0.195 inches 8 6-32 x 0.195 inches 9 6-32 x 0.195 inches A ISO M3 x 5mm C ISO M3 x 5mm E ISO M3 x 5mm PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL B 6-32 x 0.195 inches D 6-32 x 0.195 inches F 19 6-32 x 0.195 inches H ISO M3 x 5mm J ISO M3 x 5mm M 19 ISO M3 x 5mm BARRIERSVOLTAGE no <300 yes <300 yes ≥300 no <300 yes <300 yes ≥300 no yes yes no yes yes <300 <300 ≥300 <300 <300 ≥300 no yes yes no yes yes <300 <300 ≥300 <300 <300 ≥300 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted L UL489 Construction: UL Recognized & CSA Accepted R UL489 Construction: TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted 121 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL Listed – Ordering Scheme C 1 2 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 14 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 6 Frequency & Delay 450 7 Current Rating 1 2 A 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker 5 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 6 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color 7 Vertical legend 8 Horizontal legend 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 4252.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 8 TERMINAL 1 7 Stud 10-32 2 8 Screw 10-32 3 9 Stud 1/4-20 4 8 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 8 Screw M5 x 0.8 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 2 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 8 9 S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 42 4 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 4 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 4 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 4 DC Short, Hi-Inrush 54 4 DC Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 4 DC Long, Hi-Inrush 1 Notes: 2 Push-to-reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 3 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 4 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 5 Available up to 50 amps maximum. 6 Current ratings 71 - 100 with VDE approvals are available up to two poles maximum. 7 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 8 Terminal Codes 2, 4, 5 & C available to 50 amps maximum. 9 Terminal Codes 3, 6, 9 & A available to 100 amps maximum. 10 Terminal Codes 9 & C are not VDE approved. 11 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black 12 Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend on actuator. 13 VDE and TUV approval requires Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) markings on rocker. 14 Legend on push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white when single color rocker is ordered. Legend on push-to-reset bezel/shroud matches visi-color of rocker with actuator codes 15 5 & 6. 16 Recessed “OFF-SIDE” available with actuator codes 1, 2, 3, & 4. Legends on rocker are available in ink stamping only. 17 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. 18 2 & 3 pole circuit breakers required for 120/240 AC rating. 122 12 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 11 Max. App. Rating 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 5 1 SERIES C 3 POLES 2 1 One K G 10 Mounting/ Barriers 6 9 9 9,10 A 9 C 8,10 Stud M6 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 12 Actuator or Visi-Color Marking: Marking Color: Single Color 11 Color: ON-OFF Dual Rocker/Handle White B 1 Black Black D 2 White Red G 3 White Green J 4 White Blue L 5 White Yellow N 6 Black Gray Q7 Black Orange S 8 Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 12 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL Threaded Insert, 2 per pole A 6-32 X 0.195 inches C ISO M3 x 5mm RECESSED OFF ROCKER 14 Threaded Insert, 2 per pole E 6-32 x 0.195 inches F ISO M3 x 5mm PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL 13 Threaded Insert, 2 per pole B 6-32 x 0.195 inches D ISO M3 x 5mm 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 60.000 670 70.000 680 80.000 685 85.000 690 90.000 695 95.000 810 100.00 Visi-Rocker White n/a Red Green Blue Yellow Gray Orange BARRIERS 15 yes yes yes yes yes yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING A 65 DC B 125 DC C 120/240 AC 16 D 240 AC F 277 AC K 120 AC M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL A without approvals G UL 489 Listed & CSA Certified J UL489 Listed, CSA Certified & TUV Certified www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] .960 [24.38] .311 DIA [Ø7.90] .558 [14.17] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Available on Series Trip and Switch Only Circuits when called for on multi-pole units. Only one auxiliary switch is normally supplied, as viewed in mulit-pole identification scheme. www.carlingtech.com 123 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Schematic shown represents current trip circuits. 4 Available only as special catalog number. 124 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 125 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handleguard – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 126 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Arc Chute Barrier UL Recognized/Listed – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Only 1-pole and 3-pole configurations shown. Arc chute (without barrier) and arc chute barrier also available for 2-pole construction. 2 Dimensions apply to all variations shown. 3 Notice that line and load terminal orientation for indicate on and indicate off rocker circuit breakers are opposite. 4 Screw type terminals shown for Rocker style (CF1, C11, etc) circuit breakers. For other terminal configurations see circuit and terminal diagrams. 5 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 6 Tolerance ± .020 unless otherwise specified. 7 Must be ordered under a special catalog number. www.carlingtech.com 127 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Sealed Toggle – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 128 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Schematic shown represents current trip circuit. www.carlingtech.com 129 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Dimensions apply to all variations shown. Notice that circuit breaker line and load terminal orientation on indicate OFF is opposite of indicate ON. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 4 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 130 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 2 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 3 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 131 E-Series E-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction E-Series CIRCUIT BREAKER The E-Series hydraulic-magnetic circuit breaker is ideally suited for higher current and voltage applications. It is UL listed and CSA certified for branch circuit protection, which does not require a fuse back up. It is also UL recognized and CSA certified as a supplementary protector and as a manual motor controller. Its physical features include front and back mounting, screw and stud terminals and heavy duty box wire connectors for solid wire or a pressure plate connector for standard wire. The E-series is available with handle actuators and can be configured as .1-125 amps, up to 600VAC or 125VDC, with choice of time delays, actuator colors and 1 to 6 poles configuration. Additionally, a Power Selector device is also available. Product Highlights: UL listed and CSA certified Certified for circuit branch protection Recognized as a supplementary protector and as a manual motor controller Optional power selector device 132 www.carlingtech.com E-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Maximum Voltage 600VAC 50/60 Hz, 125VDC (See Table A) Current Ratings Standard current coils: 0.100, 0.250, 0.500, 1.00, 2.50, 5.00, 7.50, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0, 25.0, 30.0, 50.0, 60.0, 70.0 & 100 Amp. Auxiliary Switch Rating SPDT; 10.1A 250VAC, 1.0A 65VDC; 0.5A 80VDC, 0.1A 125VAC (with gold contacts). Insulation Resistance Minimum of 100 Megohms at 500 VDC. Dielectric Strength UL, CSA: 2200 V 50/60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals. E-Series Circuit Breakers comply with the 8mm spacing and 3750V 50/60 Hz dielectric requirements from hazardous voltage to operator accessible surfaces, between adjacent poles and from main circuits to auxiliary circuits per Publications EN 60950 and VDE 0805. Resistance, Impedance Values from Line to Load Terminal - based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker. CURRENT TOLERANCE (AMPS) (%) 0.10 - 5.0 5.1 - 20.0 ± 15 ± 25 20.1 - 50.0 ± 35 Mechanical Endurance 10,000 ON-OFF operations @ 6 per minute; with rated Current and Voltage. Trip Free All E-Series Circuit Breakers will trip on overload, even when Handle is forcibly held in the ON position. Trip Indication The operating Handle moves positively to the OFF position when an overload causes the breaker to trip. Physical Number of Poles Mounting Connectors, Box Type Internal Circuit Configuration Weight Standard Colors 1-6 A 3” minimum spacing must be provided between the circuit breaker arc venting area on back connected E-Series circuit breakers and grounded obstructions. E-Series circuit breakers must be mounted on a vertical surface. Front connected E-Series circuit breakers are supplied with box type pressure connectors that accept copper or aluminum conductors as follows: 1/0-14 Copper, 1/0-12 Aluminum. Series and Switch Only, (with or without auxiliary switch). Shunt with current coils. Approximately 252 grams/pole (Approximately 9 ounces/pole) Housing-Black; Actuator - See Ordering Scheme. Environmental Designed in accordance with requirements of specification MIL PRF-55629 & MIL-STD-202G as follows: Pulse Tolerance Curves Time Delay Curves 62, 64 & 66 (100 Amps Max.) Time Delay Curves 22, 24 & 26 (100 Amps Max.) Shock Withstands 100 Gs, 6ms, sawtooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Test Condition “I”. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz, and 10 Gs 55-500 Hz, at rated current per Method 204C, Test Condition A. Moisture Resistance Method 106D, i.e., ten 24-hour cycles @ + 25°C to +65°C, 80-98% RH. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90-95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs). Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (Five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C). Operating Temperature -40° C to +85° C *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 133 E-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: Lists UL Listed (489) & CSA Certified (C22.2 No. 5) configurations & performance capabilities as a Molded Case Circuit Breaker. E SERIES TABLE A : UL489 LISTED BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION SERIES CURRENT RATING MAX. RATING FREQUENCY PHASE FULL LOAD AMPS INTERRUPTING CAPACITY (AMPS) HIGH INTERRUPTING CAPACITY WITHOUT BACKUP (AMPS) FUSE 80 DC --- 0.10 - 100 5,000 50,000 125 DC --- 0.10 - 100 5,000 10,000 125 DC --- 0.10 - 125 10,000 --- 120 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 125 10,000 --- 240 240 50 / 60 50 / 60 1 1 0.10 - 30 31 - 100 5,000 5,000 10,000 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 10,000 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 31 - 100 5,000 --- 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 101 - 125 10,000 --- 240 50 / 60 3 0.10 - 100 5,000 --- Table B: Lists UL Recognized & CSA Accepted configurations & performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. E -SERIES TABLE B: COMPONENT SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTORS CURRENT RATING SHORT CIRCUIT CAPACITY (AMPS) UL/CSA FULL LOAD GENERAL FREQUENCY PHASE WITH BACKUP WITHOUT AMPS PURPOSE AMPS FUSE3 BACKUP FUSE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION MAX. RATING APPLICATION CODES UL CSA 125 DC --- 0.02 - 100 --- --- 5,000 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 125 150 DC DC ----- ----- 101 - 120 0.02 - 125 ----- 5,000 5,000 TC1,2, OL0, U1 TC1,2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL0, U3 TC1, OL0, U3 160 150 / 300 DC DC ----- 0.02 - 100 0.02 - 100 ----- ----- 5,000 5,000 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 SERIES & 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 --- 0.02 - 100 --- 5,000 TC1,2, OL0, U1 TC1,2, OL0, U1 SHUNT 240 250 50 / 60 50 / 60 1 1 0.02 - 100 0.02 - 100 ----- --10,000 5,000 --- TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 277 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 100 --- --10,000 5,000 --- TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 480 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 1&3 1&3 1&3 0.02 - 100 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 100 ------- 10,000 10,000 10,000 ------- TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 DC --- --- 0.02 - 125 --- 5,000 DC --- 0.02 - 120 160 DC --- 0.02 - 100 240 277 50 / 60 50 / 60 1 1 0.02 - 100 0.02 - 100 480 600 50 / 60 50 / 60 1&3 1&3 0.02 - 100 0.02 - 100 480 1 600 600 2 125 SWITCH ONLY TC1, OL0, U3 TC1, OL0, U3 Notes: 1 Per pole opposite polarity rating - Delta Configuration. 2 4 Poles connected in series 3 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL Listed Type K5 or RK5 fuse rated 15A minimum and no more than 4 times full load amp rating and not to exceed 225A. 134 www.carlingtech.com E-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table C: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted and VDE Certified configurations and performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. E -SERIES TABLE C: COMPONENT SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTORS WITH VDE CURRENT RATING VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION SHORT CIRCUIT CAPACITY (AMPS) UL/CSA MAX. FREQUENCY PHASE FULL LOAD AMPS WITH BACKUP RATING FUSE1 125 DC --- 0.1 - 100 --- WITHOUT BACKUP FUSE WITHOUT BACKUP FUSE 5,000 5,000 SERIES & 240 50 / 60 1&3 0.1 - 100 --- 5,000 5,000 SHUNT 415 50 / 60 1&3 0.1 - 100 10,000 --- 4,000 SWITCH ONLY 125 DC --- 0.1 - 125 240 50 / 60 1&3 0.1 - 100 415 50 / 60 1&3 0.1 - 100 APPLICATION CODES VDE (Icn) UL CONSTRUCTION NOTES CSA TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 1 or 2 Poles 1 - 5 Poles. Up to 4 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 Current Poles, 1 Voltage Pole 2 - 5 Poles. Up to 4 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 Current Poles, 1 Voltage Pole Notes: 1 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse rated 15A minimum and no more than 4 times full load amp rating and not to exceed 225 amps. Table D: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical and Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596). Ignition Protected per UL 1500. UL Classified Small Craft Electrical Devices, Marine in accordance with ISO 8846 (Guide UZMK, File MQ1515) as Marine Supplementary Protectors. E SERIES TABLE D : UL1500 (Marine Ignition Protection) VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION SERIES MAX. RATING FREQUENCY CURRENT RATING SHORT CIRCUIT CAPACITY (AMPS) FULL LOAD AMPS WITHOUT BACKUP FUSE UL CSA PHASE APPLICATION CODES 65 DC --- 0.02 - 100 5,000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 125 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 100 1,500 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 250 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 100 1,500 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 Agency Certifications UL Recognized UL Standard 1077 UL Standard 1500 UL Listed UL Standard 489 www.carlingtech.com Component Recognition Program as Protectors, Supplementary (Guide QVNU2, File E75596) CSA Accepted Component Supplementary Protector (Class 3215 30, File 047848 0 000) CSA Standard C22.2 No. 235 Component Recognition Program as Manual Motor Controls (Guide NLRV2, File E135367) CSA Certified Circuit Breaker Molded Case (Class 1432 01, File 093910), CSA Standard C22.2 No. 5.1 - M Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical & Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596) Ignition Protection TUV Certified EN60934 under License No. R72031056 VDE Certified EN60934, VDE 0642 under File No. 10537 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case (Guide DIVQ, File E129899) 135 E-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme E A 2 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Auxiliary Switch 24 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 ACTUATOR A Handle, one per pole 3Three 4Four 4 CIRCUIT 2 A 3 Switch Only (no coil) B Series Trip (current) C Series Trip (voltage) D Shunt Trip (current) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 3 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 5 DC Instantaneous 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 5 50/60Hz Instantaneous 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short E F G Shunt Trip (voltage) Relay Trip (current) Relay Trip (voltage) S.P.S.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals S.P.S.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T. 0.187 Q.C. Terminals S.P.D.T. 0.187 Q.C. Terminals 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 62 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 64 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 66 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 72 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 74 DC,Medium, Hi-Inrush 76 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 92 6DC, 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 94 6DC, 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 96 6DC, 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 0.350 0.400 0.450 0.500 0.550 0.600 0.650 0.700 0.750 0.800 0.850 0.900 0.950 1.000 1.250 1.500 1.750 2.000 2.250 2.500 2.750 430 435 440 445 450 455 460 465 470 475 480 485 490 495 610 710 611 711 612 712 613 3.000 3.500 4.000 4.500 5.000 5.500 6.000 6.500 7.000 7.500 8.000 8.500 9.000 9.500 10.000 10.500 11.000 11.500 12.000 12.500 13.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (MIN. TRIP RATING, VOLTS) 5 A06 6 DC, 5 DC A65 65 DC, 55 DC J48 A12 12 DC, 10 DC B25 125 DC, 100 DC J65 A18 18 DC, 15 DC J06 6 AC, 5 AC K20 A24 24 DC, 20 DC J12 12 AC, 10 AC L40 A32 32 DC, 25 DC J18 18 AC, 15 AC A48 48 DC, 40 DC J24 24 AC, 20 AC 614 615 616 617 618 620 622 624 625 630 635 640 650 660 670 680 690 810 811 812 912 8 14.000 15.000 16.000 17.000 18.000 20.000 22.000 24.000 25.000 30.000 35.000 40.000 50.000 60.000 70.000 80.000 90.000 100.000 110.000 120.000 125.000 48 AC, 40 AC 65 AC, 55 AC 120 AC, 65 AC 240 AC, 130 AC Notes: 1 VDE approval on 1-5 poles only. Standard multi-pole units identical poles except when specifying auxiliary switch - (see Note 4). For mixed ratings, consult factory. 2 Switch Only & Series Trip construction available with either front or back connected terminals. Shunt construction available with back connected terminals, (Terminal Codes 1 & 2) only. Circuit Codes B,C & D are VDE approved. 3 Switch Only construction: 30 amps or less select Current Rating Code 630; 31-70 amps, select Current Rating code 670; 71-100 amps, select Current Rating Code 810; 101-125 amps Select Current Rating Code 912. Switch Only is VDE approved only if tied to a protected pole. 136 11 Maximum Application Rating 12 Agency Approval MAX. RATING 50 A 120 A 50 A 100 A Dual Legend Color 1Black 2White 3White 4White 5White 6Black 7Black 8Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS BACK CONNECTED (FRONT MOUNTED ONLY) Mounting Inserts A6-32 B ISO M3 CODEAMPERES 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 410 512 415 517 420 522 425 527 10 Mounting/ Barriers 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 13 Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF White AB Black CD Red FG Green HJ Blue KL Yellow MN Gray PQ Orange RS 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 7 0.020 0.025 0.030 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.050 0.055 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.075 0.080 0.085 0.090 0.095 0.100 0.150 0.200 0.250 0.300 9 Actuator Color FRONT CONNECTED (BACK MOUNTED ONLY) MAX. RATING 3 10 Box Wire Connector (Line & Load) 100 A 11 C Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Line & Load) 100 A 4 10-32 Screw (Line & Load) 50 A D M5 Screw (Line & Load) 50 A 5 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), 10-32 Screw (Load) 50 A E M5 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), 10-32 Screw (Load) 50 A 6 10 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector (Load) 100 A F 11 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Load) 100 A 7 1/4-20 Screw (Line & Load) 100 A G M6 Screw (Line & Load) 100 A 8 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), 1/4-20 Screw (Load) 100 A H M6 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), M6 Screw (Load) 100 A 10 9 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector (Load) 100 A J 11 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Load) 100 A 5Five 6Six 5 AUXILIARY SWITCH 4 0 without Auxiliary Switch 6 2 S.P.D.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 7 3 S.P.D.T. 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 055 060 065 070 075 080 085 090 090 210 215 220 225 230 8 Terminal C B 8 TERMINAL 12 BACK CONNECTED (FRONT MOUNTED ONLY) 1 9 10-32 Stud (All Terminals) 2 9 1/4-20 Stud (All Terminals) A 9 M5 Stud (Line & Load) B 9 M6 Stud (Line & Load) 1 SERIES E 3 POLES 1 1 One 2Two 1 2 A FRONT CONNECTED (BACK MOUNTED ONLY) 14 Back Mounting Foot Type Front Mounting Inserts (Optional Use) CShort 6-32 D Short ISO M3 ELong 6-32 F Long ISO M3 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING 15 A 65 VDC, 120 A G 16 B 125 VDC, 120 A H 16 C 120/240 VAC, 100 A J 16 D 240 VAC, 100 A L 16 E 16 277/480 VAC, 100 A T F 277 VAC, 100 A W 16 600 VAC, 100 A 480 VAC, 100 A 415 VAC, 100 A 160 VDC, 100 A 125 VDC/240 VAC, 100 A 125 VDC/415 VAC, 100 A 12 AGENCY APPROVAL B UL 1077 / UL508 Recognized & CSA Accepted D UL 1077 Recognized, CSA Accepted, & VDE Certified 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Auxiliary Switch available on Switch Only and Series Trip units. On multi-pole units, only one auxiliary switch is normally supplied mounted in the extreme right pole. Back mounted units require special mounting provisions when auxiliary switch is specified. VDE approval on Auxilary Switch Codes 0,2,3 & 4 only. Voltage Trip Coils are not rated for continuous duty. Available only with Frequency & Delay Codes 10 & 20. Series Trip construction with a voltage coil s VDE approved only if tied to a protected pole. Frequency & Delay Codes 92,94 & 96 are not VDE Certified. Current Coil Ratings 0.100 - 100 ams are VDE Certified. 125 A rating (Code 912) available as a Switch Only (Circuit Code A), rated 125 VDC (Code B). An Anti-Flash Over Barrier is supplied between poles on multi-pole units with 10-32 (Terminal Code 1). 1/4-20 (Code 2), M5 (Code A), and M6 (Code B) terminals per UL requirement. Box Wire Connector will accept #14 through 0 AWG. copper wire or #12 through 0 AWG. aluminum wire. Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate for stranded wire, consult factory for details. Terminal Codes A,B,D,E,G & H are not VDE Certified. VDE approvals require Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) or I-O markings on all handles. Back Mounted breakers can also be front mounted by utilizing the proper front panel mounting inserts normally supplied. However, terminal connections must be made prior to mounting. Application ratings B,D,J,T & W are available with VDE. 415, 480 & 600 VAC ratings require 3 or 4 pole break 3Ø and 2 pole break 1Ø. www.carlingtech.com E-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL Listed – Ordering Scheme E A 2 1 Series 2 Actuator 24 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Auxiliary Switch 2 ACTUATOR A Handle, one per pole 3 POLES 1 1 One 2Two 3Three 4Four 5Five 6Six 4 CIRCUIT 2 B Series Trip (current) C 3 Series Trip (voltage) 5 AUXILIARY SWITCH 4 0 without Auxiliary Switch 6 2 S.P.D.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 7 3 S.P.D.T. 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 S.P.S.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals S.P.S.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T. 0.187 Q.C. Terminals S.P.D.T. 0.187 Q.C. Terminals 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 10 5 DC Instantaneous 62 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 12 DC Short 64 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 14 DC Medium 66 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 16 DC Long 72 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 20 5 50/60Hz Instantaneous 74 DC,Medium, Hi-Inrush 22 50/60Hz Short 76 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 7 CODEAMPERES 0.020 0.025 0.030 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.050 0.055 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.075 0.080 0.085 0.090 0.095 0.100 0.150 0.200 0.250 0.300 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers 8 TERMINAL 7 BACK CONNECTED (FRONT MOUNTED ONLY) 1 8 10-32 Stud (All Terminals) 2 8 1/4-20 Stud (All Terminals) 1 SERIES E 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 055 060 065 070 075 080 085 090 090 210 215 220 225 230 1 2 A 8 Terminal 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 410 512 415 517 420 522 425 527 0.350 0.400 0.450 0.500 0.550 0.600 0.650 0.700 0.750 0.800 0.850 0.900 0.950 1.000 1.250 1.500 1.750 2.000 2.250 2.500 2.750 430 435 440 445 450 455 460 465 470 475 480 485 490 495 610 710 611 711 612 712 613 3.000 3.500 4.000 4.500 5.000 5.500 6.000 6.500 7.000 7.500 8.000 8.500 9.000 9.500 10.000 10.500 11.000 11.500 12.000 12.500 13.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (MIN. TRIP RATING, VOLTS) 5 A06 6 DC, 5 DC A65 65 DC, 55 DC J48 A12 12 DC, 10 DC B25 125 DC, 100 DC J65 A18 18 DC, 15 DC J06 6 AC, 5 AC K20 A24 24 DC, 20 DC J12 12 AC, 10 AC L40 A32 32 DC, 25 DC J18 18 AC, 15 AC A48 48 DC, 40 DC J24 24 AC, 20 AC www.carlingtech.com 614 615 616 617 618 620 622 624 625 630 635 640 650 660 670 680 690 810 811 812 912 8 14.000 15.000 16.000 17.000 18.000 20.000 22.000 24.000 25.000 30.000 35.000 40.000 50.000 60.000 70.000 80.000 90.000 100.000 110.000 120.000 125.000 48 AC, 40 AC 65 AC, 55 AC 120 AC, 65 AC 240 AC, 130 AC C C 11 Maximum Application Rating 12 Agency Approval MAX. RATING 50 A 125 A FRONT CONNECTED (BACK MOUNTED ONLY) MAX. RATING 3 9 Box Wire Connector (Line & Load) 100 A C 10 Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Line & Load) 100 A 4 10-32 Screw (Line & Load) 50 A 5 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), 10-32 Screw (Load) 50 A 6 9 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector (Load) 100 A F 10 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Load) 100 A 7 1/4-20 Screw (Line & Load) 125 A 8 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), 1/4-20 Screw (Load) 100 A 9 9 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector (Load) 100 A J 10 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Load) 100 A 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 12 Actuator Color ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White B1Black Black D2White Red G3White Green J4White Blue L5White Yellow N6Black Gray Q7Black Orange S8Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS BACK CONNECTED (FRONT MOUNTED ONLY) Mounting Inserts A6-32 B ISO M3 FRONT CONNECTED (BACK MOUNTED ONLY) 11 Back Mounting Foot Type Front Mounting Inserts (Optional Use) CShort 6-32 D Short ISO M3 ELong 6-32 F Long ISO M3 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING 15 1 120 VAC B 125 VDC, 120 A 13 C 120/240 VAC, 100 A D 240 VAC, 100 A 12 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL 489 Listed & CSA Certified F UL 489 Listed, CSA Certified, & VDE Certified Notes: 1 Standard multi-pole units identical poles except when specifying auxiliary switch (see Note 4). For mixed ratings, consult factory. VDE Certification on 1-5 poles only. 2 Series Trip construction available with either front or back connected terminals. 3 Series Trip construction with a voltage coil is not available as a single pole unit and must be tied to a protected pole. 4 On multi-pole units, only one auxiliary switch is normally supplied mounted in the extreme right pole per Figure A. Back mounted units require special mounting provisions when auxiliary switch is specified. VDE Certification on auxilary switch codes 0, 2, 3 & 4 only. 5 Voltage Trip Coils are not rated for continuous duty. Available only with Frequency & Delay Codes 10 & 20. 6 Frequency & Delay Codes 92, 94 & 96 are not VDE Certified. 7 Current Ratings under 0.100 amps are not VDE Certified . 8 An Anti-Flash Over Barrier is supplied between poles on multi-pole units with 10-32 Stud (Terminal Code 1) or 1/4-20 Stud (Code 2) terminals per UL requirement. 9 Box Wire Connector will accept #14 through 0 AWG. copper wire or #12 through 0 AWG. aluminum wire. 10 Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate for stranded wire, consult factory for details. 11 Back Mounted breakers can also be front mounted by utilizing the proper front panel mounting inserts normally supplied. However, terminal connections must be made prior to mounting. 12 VDE Certification requires dual (I-O , ON-OFF) markings on all handles. 13 Not available with VDE Certification. 137 E-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 0-50 amps: 10-32 & M5 Studs .625±.062/15.88±1.574 long. 4 51-120 amps: 1/4-20 & M6 Studs .750±.062/19.05±1.574 long. 138 www.carlingtech.com E-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle (Back Connected) – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 1/4 -20 stud terminal in Series Trip circuit configuration shown. 2 A 3” min spacing must be provided between the circuit breaker arc venting area of back connected E-Series circuit breaker and grounded obstructions. 3 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 4 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 5 Circuit breakers must be mounted on vertical surface. www.carlingtech.com 139 E-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle (Front Connected) – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Box wire connector terminal in Series Trip circuit configuration shown. 4 Circuit breakers must be mounted on vertical surface. 140 www.carlingtech.com Time Delay Values - M-Series Circuit Breakers , Notes: 1 2 3 4 Delay Curves 12,14, 22, 24, 32, 34, 62, 64, 72, 74, 92, 94: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 135% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. Delay Curves 10, 20, 30: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 150% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. All Curves: Curve data shown represents breaker response at ambient temperature of 77°F (25°C) with no preloading. Breakers are mounted in standard wall-mount position. The minimum inrush pulse tolerance handling capability is 12 times the rated current on standard delays and 18 times the rated current on high inrush delays. These values are based on a 60 Hz 1/2 cycle, 8.33 ms pulse. High inrush delays should be specified for applications with high initial surge currents of short duration, such as switching power supplies, highly capacitive loads and transformer loads. Instantaneous Dual Rated AC/DC Short Short D2 Medium Medium D4 www.carlingtech.com 141 Time Delay Values - A,B,C-Series Circuit Breakers A, B, C, CX, D, G, H, L, N-SERIES TIME VALUES PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT Notes: UL489 C-Series Breakers available with Delay Curves 11, 12, 14, 16, 21, 22, 24, 26, 42, 44, 46. Delay Curves 11,12,14,16,21,22,24,26,42,44,46,52,54,56: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 125% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. Delay Curves 32,34,36: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 135% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. Delay Curves 10,20: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 150% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. All Curves: Curve data shown represents breaker response at ambient temperature of 77°F (25°C) with no preloading. Breakers are mounted in standard wall-mount position. On 50 amp and less current ratings, the minimum inrush pulse tolerance handling capability is 12 times the rated current on standard delays and 25 times the rated current on high inrush delays. These values are based on a 60 Hz 1/2 cycle, 8.33 ms pulse. High inrush delays should be specified for applications with high initial surge currents of short duration such as switching power supplies, highly capacitive loads and transformer loads. DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS AC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Instantaneous PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Ultrashort PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Short PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT 142 PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT www.carlingtech.com Time Delay Values - A,B,C-Series Circuit Breakers TRIP TIME IN SECONDS DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS AC Medium TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT Long PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS High Inrush DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS High Inrush AC Short TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT Medium TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT www.carlingtech.com PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT Long PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT 143 Time Delay Values - A,B,C-Series Circuit Breakers AC/DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Short PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Medium PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Long PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT 144 www.carlingtech.com Time Delay Values - E-Series Circuit Breaker NOTES Delay Curves 10,20,30: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 150% of rated current and greater wthin the time limit shown in these curves. Delay Curves 12,14,16,22,24,26,62,64,66,72,74,76: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 125% of rated current and greater wthin the time limit shown in these curves. Delay Curves 32,34,36,92,94,96: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 135% of rated current and greater wthin the time limit shown in these curves. All curves: Data shown represents breaker response at ambient temperature of 77°F (25°C) with no preloading: Breakers are mounted in standard wall-mount position. The minimum inrush pulse tolerance handling capacity on the above standard delays is 16 times rated current &20 times rated current for high inrush delays based on a 60Hz 1/2 cycle, 8.33 ms pulse. DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS AC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Instantaneous PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Short PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Medium PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Long PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT www.carlingtech.com PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT 145 Time Delay Values - E-Series Circuit Breaker AC/DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Instantaneous PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Short PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Medium PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Long PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT 146 www.carlingtech.com CMB CMB-Series - Introduction CMB-Series THERMAL CIRCUIT PROTECTORS The CMB-Series is a compact, single pole, push-to-reset family of thermal circuit breakers designed to protect equipment. Utilizing simple, precision design with few moving parts, these breakers offer cost effective, extremely reliable circuit protection with high resistance against shock and vibration. Product Highlights: Ratings from 3-20A, 125, 250VAC, 32VDC 2500 VAC/1 minute 60°C Max Operating Temperature 2500A @ 32VDC Interrupting Capacity 100M ohms Insulation Resistance Voltage drop <0.25 V UL, CUL, CSA, TUV, CE UL1500/ISO8846 for ignition protection/marine Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] www.carlingtech.com 147 CMB-Series - Ordering Scheme, Time Delay CMB 10 3 1 Series 2 Rating 1 SERIES CMB 2 RATING 03 3 amps 04 4 amps 05 5 amps 06 6 amps 07 7 amps 08 8 amps 11 C 3 N 3 Voltage 4 Mounting Hole 5 Bushing Type 6 Mounting Nut B 7 Indicator Plate 8 Button A /10 9 Terminal 10 Button Marking 3 VOLTAGE 3 125-250VAC/ 32 VDC 10 12 13 14 15 16 20 4 MOUNTING HOLE 11 1 M11 12 2 M12 00 3 Snap In Style 27 9 3/8” 27 UNS 28 12 3/8” 27 UNS (double flatted) 10 amps 12 amps 13 amps 14 amps 15 amps 16 amps 20 amps 5 BUSHING PLASTIC C 4 Type C D 4 Type D E 5 Type E G 8 Type G H 6 Type H K 13 Type K METAL Type J J 8 6 MOUNTING NUT 7 N None 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 11 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 6 14 Type 6 7 9 Type 7 8 9 Type 8 NOTE: Type 5 is clear hex boot. Type 8 is black hex boot (available for bushings G, J & K only); Type 3 nut includes molded in “PRESS TO RESET” marking. Embossed (ALUMINUM) 7 INDICATOR PLATE 7 N None A Embossed Legend B Silver Printing on Black Silver Printing On Black .887 [22.5] .887 [22.5] .016 [.4] .016 [.4] All indicator plates are marked “Suppl. Prot. press to reset”. 8 BUTTON B Black 9 TERMINAL A Type A B Type B C Type C D Type D E Type E R F G H J Red W Notes: All dimensions are in.[mm]. Tolerance ±.005 [.127] unless otherwise specified. 1 Used with bushing C or D only. 9 Available with G, J or K bushing only. 2 Used with H bushing only. 10 Amp rating must match button marking 3 Used with bushing E only. (ex: 20 will be marked on the button of 4 Used with M11 mounting hole only. CMB-203-27G3N-W-A/20) 5 Used with mounting hole 00 only. 11 Includes molded in “PRESS TO RESET” 6 Used with M12 mounting hole only. marking. 7 All hardware available separately. 12 Available with K bushing only. Consult factory. 13 Available with mounting hole 28 only. 8 Available with mounting hole 27 only. 14 Thickness is 3.0 mm, .118 in. White Type F Type G Type H Type J F,G,H,J TERMINALS ARE 8-32 UNC 10 BUTTON MARKING (IF BLANK, NO MARKING.)10 03 04 3 amp 4 amp 05 06 5 amp 6 amp 07 08 Button Marking Orientation: 7 amp 8 amp 10 12 line 10 amp 12 amp 20 13 14 load 13 amp 14 amp 15 16 15 amp 16 amp 20 20 amp Time Delay Derating Factor -10 °C x 1.70 -5 °C x 1.60 0 °C x 1.50 5 °C x 1.40 10 °C x 1.30 15 °C x 1.20 20 °C x 1.10 25 °C x 1.00 Derating Factor 30 °C x 0.90 35 °C x 0.85 40 °C x 0.80 45 °C x 0.75 50 °C x 0.70 55 °C x 0.65 60 °C x 0.60 Overload 100% 150% 200% 300% 400% 500% 600% Trip Time No Trip Trip in 1 hr 4.0 ~ 40 sec. 0.9 ~ 8.0 sec. .42 ~ 5.0 sec. .25 ~ 3.0 sec. .01 ~ 1.8 sec. Notes: Breaker must hold 100% of rated current and must trip at 150% and above, within the time limits shown in curve. Trip times specified at 25° ambient with no preloading. 1 To adjust the breaker rating for ambient temperature multiply the breaker rating by the factor. (ex: 5 amp rating at 0°C: 5 x .67 = 3.3 amp. Select 3 amp rating.) *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 148 www.carlingtech.com CLB CLB-Series - Introduction CLB-Series THERMAL CIRCUIT PROTECTORS The CLB-Series is a compact, single pole, push-to-reset family of thermal circuit breakers designed to protect equipment. Utilizing simple, precision design with few moving parts, these breakers offer cost effective, extremely reliable circuit protection with high resistance against shock and vibration. Product Highlights: Ratings from 3-60A, 125, 250VAC, 32VDC 2500 VAC/1 minute 60°C Max Operating Temperature 2500A @ 32VDC Interrupting Capacity 100M ohms Insulation Resistance Voltage drop <0.25 V UL, CUL, CSA, TUV, CE UL1500/ISO8846 for ignition protection/marine Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 3-40A Construction www.carlingtech.com 50 & 60A Construction 149 CLB-Series - Ordering Scheme, Time Delay CLB 10 3 1 Series 2 Rating 1 SERIES CLB 2 RATING 03 3 amps 04 4 amps 05 5 amps 06 6 amps 07 7 amps 08 8 amps 10 10 amps 12 12 amps 13 13 amps 12 C 3 N 3 Voltage 4 Mounting Hole 5 Bushing Type 6 Mounting Nut B 7 Indicator Plate A / 10 8 Button 9 Terminal 10 Button Marking 3 VOLTAGE 3 125-250VAC/ 32 VDC 15 15 amps 18 18 amps 20 20 amps 25 25 amps 30 30 amps 35 35 amps 40 40 amps 50 12 50 amps 60 12 60 amps 4 MOUNTING HOLE 11 1 M11 12 2 M12 00 3 Snap In Style 27 4 3/8” 27 UNS 5 BUSHING METAL Type A A 6 Type B B 6 8 Type J J PLASTIC Type C C 5 Type D D 7 8 Type E E 6 MOUNTING NUT 9 N None 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 6 4, 14 Type 6 4 7 Type 7 8 4 Type 8 NOTE: Type 5 is clear hex boot. Type 8 is black hex boot (available for bushings E & J only); Type 3 nut includes molded in “PRESS TO RESET” marking. Embossed (ALUMINUM) 7 INDICATOR PLATE 9 N None A Embossed B Silver Printing on Black .887 [22.5] Silver Printing On Black .016 [.4] .887 [22.5] .016 [.4] All indicator plates are marked “Suppl. Prot. press to reset”. 8 BUTTON B Black 9 TERMINAL 10,11,15 A Type A F B Type B G C Type C H D Type D J E Type E R Red W Notes: All dimensions are in.[mm]. Tolerance ±.005 [.127] unless otherwise specified. 1 Used with bushing A or B only. 10 > 35 amp ratings must use solder joint to con 2 Used with bushing C only. nect wire to non-screw type terminals. 3 Used with bushing D only. 11 Terminals are .040 [1.0] thickness for rating> 35, 4 Used with bushing E & J only. & .315 [.8] thickness is for ratings < 35 amps. 5 Used with M12 mounting hole only. 12 Available only with 10-24 unc. screw terms. 6 Used with M11 mounting hole only. (select type F, G, H, J only.) UL, CUL only. 7 Used with mounting hole 00 only. 13 Amp rating must match button marking (ex: “20” 8 Used with 27 mounting hole only. will be marked on the button of the breaker) 9 All hardware available separately. 14 Thickness is 3.0 mm, .118 in. Consult factory. 15 Screw terminals are 8-32 UNC White Type F Type G Type H Type J 10 BUTTON MARKING (IF BLANK, NO MARKING.)13 Button Marking Orientation: 03 04 05 3 amp 4 amp 5 amp 06 07 08 6 amp 7 amp 8 amp 10 12 13 10 amp 12 amp 13 amp 15 18 20 line 20 load 15 amp 18 amp 20 amp 25 30 35 25 amp 30 amp 35 amp 40 50 60 40 amp 50 amp 60 amp Time Delay Derating Factor -10 °C x 1.70 -5 °C x 1.60 0 °C x 1.50 5 °C x 1.40 10 °C x 1.30 15 °C x 1.20 20 °C x 1.10 25 °C x 1.00 Derating Factor 30 °C x 0.90 35 °C x 0.85 40 °C x 0.80 45 °C x 0.75 50 °C x 0.70 55 °C x 0.65 60 °C x 0.60 Overload 100% 150% 200% 300% 400% 500% 600% Trip Time No Trip Trip in 1 hr 4.0 ~ 40 sec. 0.9 ~ 8.0 sec. .42 ~ 5.0 sec. .25 ~ 3.0 sec. .01 ~ 1.8 sec. Notes: Breaker must hold 100% of rated current and must trip at 150% and above, within the time limits shown in curve. Trip times specified at 25° ambient with no preloading. 1 To adjust the breaker rating for ambient temperature multiply the breaker rating by the factor. (ex: 5 amp rating at 0°C: 5 x .67 = 3.3 amp. Select 3 amp rating.) *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 150 www.carlingtech.com CMBA/CLBA-Series - Auto Reset - Introduction CMBA/CLBA CMBA/CLBA-Series THERMAL CIRCUIT PROTECTORS The CMBA/CLBA-Series features automatic cycling and resetting thermal protection capabilities with the same performance as its traditional push-to-reset counterparts. Product Highlights: CMBA: 3-20A, 125, 250VAC, 32VDC CLBA: 3-40A, 125, 250VAC, 32VDC 2500 VAC/1 minute 60°C Max Operating Temperature 2500A @ 32VDC Interrupting Capacity 100M ohms Insulation Resistance Voltage drop <0.25 V UL, cUL, TUV Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] CMBA Construction www.carlingtech.com CLBA Construction 151 CMBA/CLBA-Series - Auto-Reset - Ordering Scheme CMBA 1 Series 10 3 2 Rating 3 Voltage NN F N N 4 Mounting 5 Bushing 1 SERIES CMBA 6 Mounting Nut B 7 Indicator Plate A 8 Button Color 9 Terminal 10 Plug Marking 7 INDICATOR PLATE N N/A 2 RATING 2 03 3 amps 04 4 amps 05 5 amps 06 6 amps 07 7 amps 08 8 amps 10 12 13 15 18 20 8 BUTTON COLOR B Flush Black 10 amps 12 amps 13 amps 15 amps 18 amps 20 amps 9 TERMINAL A Type A 3 VOLTAGE 3 125-250VAC/ 32 VDC 4 MOUNTING NN Plug In 10 BUTTON MARKING 1 (IF BLANK, NO MARKING) Plug Marking Orientation: 5 BUSHING F None 03 04 05 06 6 MOUNTING NUT N N/A CLBA 1 Series 10 3 2 Rating 3 Voltage 07 08 10 12 7 amp 8 amp 10 amp 12 amp NN F N N 4 Mounting 5 Bushing 1 SERIES CLBA 2 RATING 2 03 3 amps 04 4 amps 05 5 amps 06 6 amps 07 7 amps 08 8 amps 10 10 amps 12 12 amps 3 amp 4 amp 5 amp 6 amp 6 Mounting Nut line 20 load 13 15 18 20 13 amp 15 amp 18 amp 20 amp B 7 Indicator Plate A 8 Button Color 9 Terminal 10 Plug Marking 7 INDICATOR PLATE N N/A 13 15 18 20 25 30 35 40 13 amps 15 amps 18 amps 20 amps 25 amps 30 amps 35 amps 40 amps 8 BUTTON COLOR B Flush Black 9 TERMINAL A Type A 3 VOLTAGE 3 125-250VAC/ 32 VDC 4 MOUNTING NN Plug In 5 BUSHING F None 10 BUTTON MARKING 1 (IF BLANK, NO MARKING) Plug Marking Orientation: 03 04 05 06 3 amp 4 amp 5 amp 6 amp 07 08 10 12 line 7 amp 8 amp 10 amp 12 amp 20 load 13 15 18 20 13 amp 15 amp 18 amp 20 amp 25 30 35 40 25 amp 30 amp 35 amp 40 amp 6 MOUNTING NUT N N/A Notes: 1 Amp rating must match plug marking. (ex: “20” will be marked on the plug of the breaker) No marking is standard. 2 See CMB/CLB graph for time delay information. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 152 www.carlingtech.com PB-Series PB-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction PB-Series GFCI/ELCI & PANEL SEAL The new PB-Series, AC Residual Current Circuit Breaker with Overcurrent Protection (RCBO), combines the ground fault protection of a GFCI with the familiar overcurrent tripping characteristics of a normal circuit breaker. It utilizes the hydraulic magnetic principle which provides precise operation and performance even when exposed to extremely hot and/or cold application environments. These precision mechanisms are temperature stable and are not adversely affected by temperature changes in their operating environment. As such, derating considerations due to temperature variations are not normally required, and heat-induced nuisance tripping is avoided. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS Product Highlights: Overload, short circuit and ground fault protection in a single package Handle or rocker style actuators Wiping Contacts - Mechanical linkage with twostep actuation - cleans contacts, provides high, positive contact pressure & longer contact life. A trip-free mechanism, a safety feature which makes it impossible to manually hold the contacts closed during overload or fault conditions. A common trip linkage between all poles, another safety feature, ensures that an overload in one pole will trip all adjacent poles. Front panel mounting Integral push-to-test button www.carlingtech.com STP Benefits: Increases safety around boats and marinas Protects against electrical shock hazards in areas near water Protects against defects in wires & conductors Reduces fire and shock hazards from defects in permanently installed appliances such as water heaters, battery chargers, lighting fixtures, etc. Detects lower level ground faults which do not trip ordinary circuit breakers, but can lead to fires, and shock hazards for boating occupants 153 PB-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: UL Listed configurations and performance capabilities as Circuit Breakers. PB-SERIES TABLE A Voltage Current Interrupting Rating Capacity Max Frequency Phase (Amps) (Amps) Rating Circuit Configuration Series 120 60 1 .10 - 30 5000 Electrical Maximum Voltage 120/240VAC 60 Hz Current Ratings Standard current coils: 0.100, 0.250, 0.500, 0.750, 1.00, 2.50, 5.00, 7.50, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0, 25.0 & 30.0 amps. Other ratings available, see ordering scheme. Insulation Resistance Minimum of 100 Megohms at 500 VDC. Dielectric Strength UL, CUL - 1500 V 60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals. PB-Series circuit breakers comply with the 8mm spacing and 3750V 60 Hz dielectric requirements from hazardous voltage to operator accessible surfaces and between adjacent poles RESISTANCE, IMPEDANCE VALUES Impedance from Line to Load Terminals Values from Line to Load Terminal (Values Based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker) Ampere Rating 1000 CURRENT (AMPS) TOLERANCE (%) 0.10 - 5.0 5.10 - 20.0 20.10 - 30.0 ± 15 ± 25 ± 35 100 10 O H M S 1 Pulse Tolerance Curve 0.1 Ir 0.001 0.01 Multiple of Rated Current 0.01 0.1 1 10 60 Hz 1/2 Cycle Inrush Pulse Tolerance Time Delay Curves 22, 24, 26 12x 100 t AMPERE RATING 4.165 8.33 CURRENT (AMPS) TOLERANCE (%) ± 15% Leakage To Ground 5.1 - 20.0 ± 25% 20.1 - 30.0 ± 35% FIGURE 1 Endurance 10,000 ON-OFF operations @ 6 per minute; with rated Current & Voltage. Trip Free All PB-Series Circuit Breakers will trip on overload or ground fault, even when Handle is forcibly held in the ON position. Trip Indication The operating Handle moves positively to the OFF position when an overload or ground fault causes the breaker to trip. Physical Number of Poles 1 - 3 poles, where the third pole is neutral Internal Circuit Config. Series Trip Weight Approximately 65 grams/pole. (2.32 ounces/pole.) Standard Colors Housing- Black; Actuator - See Ordering Scheme. Environmental Designed and tested in accordance with requirements of specification MIL-PRF- 55629 and MIL-STD-202 as follows: Shock Withstands 100 Gs, 6ms, sawtooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Test Condition “I”. Ultra- short curves tested @ 90% of rated current. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz, and 10 Gs 55-500 Hz, at rated current per Method 204C, Test Condition A. Instantaneous and ultrashort curves tested at 90% of rated current. Moisture Resistance Method 106D, i.e., ten 24-hour cycles @ + 25°C to +65°C, 80-98% RH. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90-95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs). Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (Five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C). Operating Temperature -35° C to +65° C Corrosion Tested FMG Test. 3 weeks @ 30°C 75% RH, 100ppb H2S, 20ppb CI2, 200ppb NO2 16.67 Time in Milliseconds 0.100 - 5.0 Mechanical Standard Must Trip 120/240VAC 60 Hz Leakage Current Ratings 5 & 30 milliamps. 5± 1mA For other ratings, consult factory. Trip Time 300 ms Max. @ 100%, 40ms Max. @ 500% of must trip leakage current. Test Button On unit face along side of actuator. Agency Certifications UL Listed UL Standard 489 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, (Guide DIVQ, File E129899) UL Standard 1077 Supplementary Protectors UL Standard 1053 Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 154 www.carlingtech.com PB-Series Circuit Breaker - Ordering Scheme PB A 1 Series B A 3 Circuit 2 System Voltage/Poles 4 Actuator 24 620 5 Frequency & Delay 6 Current Rating 1 SERIES PB 2 SYSTEM VOLTAGE / POLES A 120 VAC single phase, one pole B 120/240 VAC single phase, two pole C 120/240 VAC single phase with switched neutral, three pole D 120 VAC two pole with switched neutral 3 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 4 ACTUATOR 1 Handle A one per pole B one per multipole unit Two Color Curved Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single Color Curved Rocker J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend Two Color Flat Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single Color Flat Rocker 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend 2 B A 7 Terminal 8 Actuator Color 7 TERMINAL 2 13 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 2 Screw 8-32 w/upturned lugs 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) 4 Screw 10-32 w/upturned lugs 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) A G 9 Mounting/ Barriers B C E H 10 Trip Level 11 Agency Approval Screw M5 w/upturned lugs Screw M4 w/upturned lugs Screw M4 (Bus Type) Screw M5 (Bus Type) 8 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND HandleRocker Actuator Color Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF Dual Single Visi-Rocker White A B 1Black White Black C D 2White N/A Red F G 3White Red Green H J 4White Green Blue K L 5White Blue Yellow M N 6Black Yellow Gray P Q 7Black Gray Orange R S 8Black Orange 9 MOUNTING/BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE Threaded Insert, 2 per pole A 6-32 X 0.195 inches B ISO M3 x 5mm BARRIERS yes yes 10 LEAKAGE CURRENT TRIP LEVEL - MAX. TRIP CURRENT A 5 MA (CLASS A GFCI) 3,4 E 30 MA (ELCI) 11 AGENCY APPROVAL G UL489 Listed, CSA Certified C UL1077 I UL1077/UL1500 Ignition Protected 5 Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided unassembled with multi-pole units. B: Handle location as viewed from front of breaker: 2 pole - left pole 3 pole - center pole 2 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. 3 Available with leakage current trip level - Max trip current code E, and agency approval C. 4 30mA per UL1053, available with agency approval codes C & G. 5 UL1500 only available with 30MA trip level. 5 FREQUENCY & DELAY 22 60Hz Short 24 60Hz Medium 26 60Hz Long 6 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODE AMPERES 210 0.100 215 0.150 220 0.200 225 0.250 230 0.300 235 0.350 240 0.400 2450.450 250 0.500 255 0.550 260 0.600 265 0.650 270 0.700 275 0.750 280 0.800 285 290 295 410 512 415 517 420 522 425 527 430 435 440 445 0.850 0.900 0.950 1.000 1.250 1.500 1.750 2.000 2.250 2.500 2.750 3.000 3.500 4.000 4.500 www.carlingtech.com 450 455 460 465 470 475 480 485 490 495 610 710 611 711 612 5.000 5.500 6.000 6.500 7.000 7.500 8.000 8.500 9.000 9.500 10.000 10.500 11.000 11.500 12.000 712 613 614 615 616 617 618 620 622 624 625 630 12.500 13.000 14.000 15.000 16.000 17.000 18.000 20.000 22.000 24.000 25.000 30.000 155 PB-Series Circuit Breaker - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] INDICATE "ON" 1.515 MAX [38.48] 3.03 [76.9] INDICATE "OFF" AND SINGLE COLOR LINE .21 [5.3] 1.25 [31.6] TEST LOAD 2.17 [55.0] LOAD 1-POLE 120 VAC VERSION TEST LINE SCALE 0.500 #6-32/M3 MOUNTING INSERTS 1.88 [47.8] LINE TERMINAL 2.265 MAX [57.53] 1.660 [42.16] 2.58 [65.6] TEST 2.37 [60.2] +.020 1.500 -.000 +.50 38.10 -.00 [ .375 [9.53] ] .750 TYP [19.05] .39 [9.9] CURRENT TRANSFORMERS LOAD TERMINAL 1.260 [32.00] 1.660 [42.16] GFCI NEUTRAL WIRE 2-POLE 120/240 VAC VERSION .20 [5.1] +.020 2.250 -.000 +.50 57.15 -.00 SCALE 0.500 Ø .156 TYP [3.96] [ ] PANEL CUTOUT NEUTRAL BREAK POLE 3.015 MAX [76.58] .750 TYP [19.05] TEST 2-POLE 120/240 VAC WITH NEUTRAL BREAK Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 156 www.carlingtech.com PB-Series Circuit Breaker - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 157 PB-Series Circuit Breaker - Wiring Diagrams 120 VAC with Switched Neutral 120 VAC without Switched Neutral SYSTEM NEUTRAL SYSTEM NEUTRAL GFCI MODULE PIGTAIL GFCI MODULE PIGTAIL LOAD HOT LOAD NEUTRAL LOAD HOT LINE/SOURCE (HOT) LINE/SYSTEM NEUTRAL LINE/SOURCE (HOT) 120 VAC LOAD 120 VAC LOAD AC SOURCE AC SOURCE 120 VAC WITH SWITCHED NEUTRAL 120 VAC WITHOUT SWITCHED NEUTRAL 120 VAC WITH SWITCHED NEUTRAL 120 VAC WITHOUT SWITCHED NEUTRAL 120/240 VAC with Switched Neutral 120/240 VAC without Switched Neutral SYSTEM NEUTRAL SYSTEM NEUTRAL GFCI MODULE PIGTAIL GFCI MODULE PIGTAIL LOAD HOT 1 LINE/SOURCE 1 120 VAC LOAD 120 VAC LOAD LOAD HOT 2 LINE/ SOURCE 2 LOAD HOT 1 LOAD NEUTRAL LINE/SYSTEM NEUTRAL LOAD HOT (2) LINE/ SOURCE (2) LINE/SOURCE (1) 120 VAC LOAD 120 VAC LOAD 240 VAC LOAD 240 VAC LOAD AC SOURCE 120 VAC WITH SWITCHED NEUTRAL 120/240 VAC WITH SWITCHED NEUTRAL 158 AC SOURCE 120 VAC WITHOUT SWITCHED NEUTRAL 120/240 VAC WITHOUT SWITCHED NEUTRAL www.carlingtech.com PB-Series Circuit Breaker - Panel Seal Ordering Scheme 8 PB 1 Type Number 2 Series 1 TYPE NUMBER 8 Circuit Breaker Assembly 2 SERIES PB 3 ACTUATOR TYPE 1 Handle, one per pole 2 Handle, one per multipole unit ARocker 2 4 POLES PER UNIT - INCLUDING ELECTRONIC MODULE 2Two 3Three 4Four 1 4 1 3 Actuator 4 Poles 5 Mounting 5 MOUNTING SCREWS / PLATE MATERIAL 1 1 6-32 Thread Phillips Head 2 M-3 Thread Phillips Head 3 6-32 Thread Slotted Head 4 M-3 Thread Slotted Head 5 6-32 Thread Phillips Head with Stainless Steel Plate 6 M-3 Thread Phillips Head with Stainless Steel Plate 7 6-32 Thread Slotted Head with Stainless Steel Plate 8 M-3 Thread Slotted Head with Stainless Steel Plate Notes: 1 Screws supplied to accommodate mounting panel thickness of 1/8” ± 1/32”. Consult Factory for additional options 2 Available for Flat and Curved Rocker options - No Rockerguard Bracket Handle Style Panel Seal Rocker Style Panel Seal www.carlingtech.com 159 PB-Series Circuit Breaker - Panel Seal Configuration - Dimensional Specifications Handle Actuator Rocker Actuator 160 www.carlingtech.com PB-Series Circuit Breaker - Time Delay Curves Time Delay Curves Instantaneous Medium Short Long www.carlingtech.com 161 PC-Series PC-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction PC-Series GFCI/ELCI & PANEL SEAL The PC-Series, AC Residual Current Circuit Breaker with Overcurrent Protection (RCBO), combines the ground fault protection of a GFCI with the familiar overcurrent tripping characteristics of a normal circuit breaker. The PC-Series utilizes the hydraulic-magnetic principle which provides precise operation and performance even when exposed to extremely hot and/or cold application environments. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS Product Highlights: Overload, short circuit and ground fault protection in a single package Handle style actuators and rocker style “acuguard” Wiping Contacts - Mechanical linkage with twostep actuation - cleans contacts, provides high, positive contact pressure & longer contact life A trip-free mechanism, a safety feature which makes it impossible to manually hold the contacts closed during overload or fault conditions. A common trip linkage between poles ensures that an overload in one pole will trip all adjacent poles. Front panel mounting Integral push-to-test button Two integrated LED indicators show if a breaker is closed w/ Line Voltage present, or has opened due to leakage current, opened due to overcurrent, or closed w/ no Line Voltage present. Optional Hot/Neutral reversal detection and protection 162 STP Benefits: Increases safety around boats, marinas and generators Protects against electrical shock hazards in areas near water Protects against defects in the wires & conductors Reduces fire and shock hazards from defects in permanently installed appliances such as water heaters, battery chargers, lighting fixtures, etc. Detects low level ground faults, which do not trip ordinary circuit breakers, that can lead to fires and shock hazards for boating occupants www.carlingtech.com PC-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications PC-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES MOUNTING PLATE Available in stainless steal or zinc chromate plated carbon steel OPTIONAL SEAL IP66/67 panel seals provide ideal protection against salt spray, ozone, dust, water and most acids LEDs Two separate lights that indicate power and ground fault leakage *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 163 PC-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: UL Listed & CSA Certified configurations as a Ground Fault Circuit Interruptor PC-SERIES TABLE A: UL Listed / CSA 22.2 No. 144.1 Configurations as a Ground Fault Circuit Interruptor Voltage Current Short Circuit Ground Fault Circuit Configuration Max Rating Frequency Phase Series 120 120 / 240 50 / 60 50 / 60 1 1 Rating (Amps) Capacity (Amps) Trip Level (Milliamps) 1 - 50 1 - 50 5000 5000 6 6 Notes 1 or 2 Poles. One pole of a two pole unit must be Neutral 1 or 2 Poles. One pole of a three pole unit must be Neutral Table B: UL Recognized as an Earth Leakage Circuit Interruptor - 120 and 120/240V PC-SERIES TABLE B: UL Recognized Configurations as an Earth Leakage Circuit Interruptor Voltage Current Short Circuit Ground Fault Circuit Configuration Max Rating Frequency Phase 120 120 / 240 120 Series Ignition Protection 120 / 240 Series 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 1 1 1 1 Rating (Amps) Capacity (Amps) Trip Level (Milliamps) 1 - 50 1 - 50 1 - 50 1 - 50 5000 5000 3000 5000 30 30 30 30 Notes 1 or 2 Poles. One pole of a two pole unit must be Neutral 1 or 2 Poles. One pole of a three pole unit must be Neutral 1 or 2 Poles. One pole of a two pole unit must be Neutral 1 or 2 Poles. One pole of a three pole unit must be Neutral Table C: UL Recognized as an Earth Leakage Circuit Interruptor - 240V PC-SERIES TABLE C: UL Recognized Configurations as an Earth Leakage Circuit Interruptor - 240V Voltage Current Short Circuit Ground Fault Circuit Rating Configuration Max Rating Frequency Phase (Amps) Series Series Ignition Protection Capacity (Amps) Trip Level (Milliamps) Notes 240 50 / 60 1 1 - 30 5000 30 2 or 3 Poles. One pole of a two pole unit must be Neutral. Suffix 11 240 50 / 60 1 1 - 50 5000 30 2 or 3 Poles. One pole of a three pole unit must be Neutral. Suffix 12 Agency Certifications UL Standard 489 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, (Guide DIVQ, File E129899) UL Standard 1077 Supplementary Protectors CSA 22.2 No. 144.1 Class A Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters UL Standard 1053 Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment UL Standard 1500 Ignition Protection 164 www.carlingtech.com PC-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Current Ratings Voltage Rating Current Trip Level Current Trip Time Operating Frequency Interrupt Capacity Impedance 1 - 50 Amps maximum 120VAC, 120/240VAC, 240VAC 30mA & 6mA For 30mA leakage trip: ≤ 22.2mA, shall not trip 30mA, shall trip within .10 seconds The above complies with & ABYC E11. For 6mA leakage trip: ≤25ms 50/60 Hz for 30mA leakage trip 60 Hz for 6mA leakage trip 5,000 Amps RESISTANCE, IMPEDANCE VALUES from Line to Load Terminals (Values Based on Series Trip Circuit Braker) 1000 100 10 O H M S CURRENT (AMPS) TOLERANCE (%) 0.10 - 5.0 5.10 - 20.0 20.10 - 50.0 ± 15 ± 25 ± 35 1 0.1 Endurance Trip Free 10,000 ON-OFF operations @ 6 per minute; with rated Current & Voltage. Trips on short circuit, overload or leakage to ground, even when actuator is forcibly held in the “On” position Physical Number of Poles 1-pole (1 Circuit Breaker + 1 (Breakers only) GFCI Sensor Module), 120V 2-pole (2 Circuit Breakers + 1 GFCI Sensor Module), 120/240V or 120V with Neutral Break. 240VAC two pole. 3-pole 120/240V with Neutral Break (Sensor module has 2 pole width) Circuit Breaker Line Side: #10-32, Threaded stud. Termination GFCI Sensor Module Load Side: #10-32 threaded stud. Neutral pigtail. Mounting Front Panel, #6-32 and M3 threaded inserts. Actuator Handle, Flat Rocker, Curved Rocker (with or without rocker guard), Push-to-Reset Rocker Environmental 0.01 0.001 0.01 Mechanical 0.1 1 10 100 AMPERE RATING Innovative Features CURRENT (AMPS) TOLERANCE (%) 0.100 - 5.0 ± 15% 5.1 - 20.0 ± 25% Indicator Neutral Protection Test Button 20.1 - 30.0 ± 35% FIGURE 1 www.carlingtech.com Two integrated LEDs, Red & Green Green LED On, Red LED Off Line Voltage is present, the breaker is closed, and the device is protecting the circuits against over current and leakage current. Green LED Off, Red LED On The device has detected leakage current and has opened the circuit breaker. Green LED Flashing, Red LED Off The circuit breaker has opened due to over current or has been turned off manually Green LED Off, Red LED Off Line Voltage is not present Green LED Flashing, Red LED Off, Amber LED ON Indicates Hot & Neutral are reversed and the circuit breaker is open When neutral is grounded on load side of circuit Located on Ground Fault Module Designed and tested in accordance with requirements of specification MIL-PRF- 55629 and MIL-STD-202G as follows: Shock Vibration Moisture Resistance Operating Temperature Corrosion Withstands 100 G, 6ms, sawtooth at rated current per Method 213, Test Condition “I”. Withstands 0.06” excursion from 10-55 Hz, and 10 G 55-500 Hz, a rated current per Method 204C, Test Condition A. Instantaneous & ultrashort curves tested at 90% of rated current. 93% RH at 30°C for 168 Hours. -35°C to +66°C Humidity: 30±2°C, 70±2% relative humidity Mixed Flowing Gases: 100 ppb H2S, 20 ppb CI2, 200±50 ppb NO2 165 PC-Series Circuit Breaker - Ordering Scheme PC B 1 Series 2 System Voltage/Poles B A 3 Circuit 4 Actuator 24 620 5 Frequency & Delay 6 Current Rating 1 SERIES PC 3 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 8 Actuator Color 9 Mounting/ Barriers 10 Trip Level 11 Agency Approval CODE AMPERES 410 512 415 517 420 522 425 527 430 435 440 1.000 1.250 1.500 1.750 2.000 2.250 2.500 2.750 3.000 3.500 4.000 445 450 455 460 465 470 475 480 485 490 495 4.500 5.000 5.500 6.000 6.500 7.000 7.500 8.000 8.500 9.000 9.500 610 710 611 711 612 712 613 614 615 616 617 10.000 10.500 11.000 11.500 12.000 12.500 13.000 14.000 15.000 16.000 17.000 618 620 622 624 625 630 635 640 650 18.000 20.000 22.000 24.000 25.000 30.000 35.000 40.000 50.000 7 TERMINAL 1 Stud, 10-32 threaded Single Color Curved Rocker Push-to-Reset R Vertical legend U Horizontal legend Two Color Flat Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single Color Flat Rocker 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend Two Color Flat Visi-Rocker Push-to-Reset 5 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 6 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single Color Flat Rocker Push-to-Reset 7 Vertical legend 8 Horizontal legend 5 FREQUENCY & DELAY 20 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long Notes: 1 This device meets the requirements of ABCY E11. 2 30mA per UL1053, available with agency approval codes 11 & 12. 166 7 Terminal A 10 6 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 2 SYSTEM VOLTAGE / POLES A 120 VAC single phase, 1 pole B 120/240 VAC single phase, 2 pole C 120/240 VAC single phase with switched neutral, 3 pole D 120 VAC single phase with switched neutral, 2 pole E 120 VAC single phase with reversed polarity indicator, 2 pole F 120/240 VAC single phase with reversed polarity indicator, 3 pole G 240 VAC single phase, 2 pole 4 ACTUATOR Handle A 1 per breaker pole B 1 per unit Two Color Curved Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single Color Curved Rocker J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend Two Color Curved Visi-Rocker Push-to-Reset N Indicate OFF, Vertical legend O Indicate OFF, Horizontal legend 1 B A 8 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND HandleRocker Actuator Color Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF Dual Single Visi-Rocker White A B 1Black White Black C D 2White N/A Red F G 3White Red Green H J 4White Green Blue K L 5White Blue Yellow M N 6Black Yellow Gray P Q 7Black Gray Orange R S 8Black Orange 9 MOUNTING/BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole A 6-32 X 0.195 inches yes B ISO M3 x 5mm yes Rockerguard Bezel Threaded Insert, 2 per pole C 6-32 X 0.195 inches yes D ISO M3 x 5mm yes Standard Bezel with Recessed Off-Side Flat Rocker Threaded Insert, 2 per pole E 6-32 X 0.195 inches yes F ISO M3 x 5mm yes Push-to-Reset Bezel Threaded Insert, 2 per pole G 6-32 X 0.195 inches yes H ISO M3 x 5mm yes 10 LEAKAGE CURRENT TRIP LEVEL - MAX. TRIP CURRENT A 6 MA (CLASS A GFCI) E 30 MA (ELCI) 1,2 11 AGENCY APPROVAL AA without Approvals 10 CSA certified 11 UL 1053 1,2 12 UL 1053 & UL 1500 1,2 www.carlingtech.com PC-Series Circuit Breaker - Wiring Diagrams INDICATE OFF / SINGLE COLOR ROCKER ACTUATOR HANDLE / INDICATE ON ROCKER ACTUATOR TERMINAL LOCATIONS IND PCE 120 VAC VERSION W/ REVERSE POLAR INDICATOR PCA 120 VAC VERSION PCF 120/240 VAC VERSION W/ REVERSE POLARITY INDICATOR PCB 120/240 VAC VERSION 3.015 [76.58] MAX. PCC 120/240 VAC VERSION W/ NEUTRAL BREAK 3.775 [95.88] MAX. PCD 120 VAC VERSION W/NEUTRAL BREAK www.carlingtech.com 167 PC-Series Circuit Breaker - Wiring Diagrams & Panel Cut Out OURCE UTRAL TERMINAL LOCATIONS HANDLE / INDICATE ON ROCKER ACTUATOR INDICATE OFF / SINGLE COLOR ROCKER ACTUATOR S PCE 120 VAC VERSION W/ REVERSE POLARITY INDICATOR PCF 120/240 VAC VERSION W/ REVERSE POLARITY INDICATOR NOTE: NEUTRAL & GROUND PIGTAIL WIRES - SUPPLIED 12" LONG MIN. (CIRCUIT CODES A,B,E & F) 3.790 [96.27] 3.790 [96.27] 3.040 [77.22] 2.280 [57.91] 3.040 [77.22] 3.040 [77.22] 3.040 [77.22] 2.280 [57.91] 2.280 [57.91] 2.280 [57.91] .156 DIA..156 [Ø3.96] DIA. [Ø3.96] 2 PLC'S.2TYP. PLC'S. TYP. PER POLE PER POLE 1.660 [42.16] 1.660 [42.16] 1.453 [36.91] 1.260 [32.00] 1.453 [36.91] 1.260 [32.00] 2.062 [52.37] 2.062 [52.37] LINE 1 LINE 2 .200 [5.08] .432 [10.97] .750 [19.05] TYP. .432 [10.97] .750 [19.05] TYP. PCA LOAD HOT 1 LINE 2 OR 230V NEUTRAL LINE 1 PCA, PCB PCD & PCE PCA, PCB & PCF PCD &PCC PCE PCC & PCF PCB, PCD & PCE PCA LOAD HOT 2 OR 230V NEUTRAL .200 [5.08] PCC & PCF PCB, PCD & PCE HANDLE ACTUATOR ROCKER ACTUATOR PCC & PCF HANDLE ACTUATOR PANEL CUTOUT DETAIL ROCKER ACTUATOR TOLERANCES ±.005 [.12] 1-Phase 240VAC PANEL CUTOUT DETAIL TOLERANCES ±.005 [.12] 168 www.carlingtech.com PC-Series Circuit Breaker - Dimensional Specifications 2.265 [57.53] MAX. 1.510 [38.35] 2.975 [75.57] 0.430 [10.92] 0.275 [6.99] 0.750 TYP. [19.05] 2.518 [63.96] 2.062 [52.37] 3.800 [96.52] 1.453 [36.91] 0.429 [10.91] 0.350 [8.89] NEUTRAL PIGTAIL (CIRCUIT CODE A+B ONLY) #6/32 / M3 MOUNTING INSERTS 0.125 [3.18] 1.245 1.660 [31.62] [42.16] 0.208 [5.28] 0.100 [2.54] Notes: For additional circuit breaker dimensions, reference the C-Series Breakers in the Carling Circuit Protection catalog www.carlingtech.com 169 PC-Series Circuit Breaker - Panel Seal Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications 8 PC 1 Type Number 2 Series 1 4 1 3 Actuator 4 Poles 5 Mounting 5 MOUNTING SCREWS / PLATE MATERIAL 1 1 6-32 Thread Phillips Head 2 M-3 Thread Phillips Head 3 6-32 Thread Slotted Head 4 M-3 Thread Slotted Head 5 6-32 Thread Phillips Head w/ Stainless Steel Plate 6 M-3 Thread Phillips Head w/ Stainless Steel Plate 7 6-32 Thread Slotted Head w/ Stainless Steel Plate 8 M-3 Thread Slotted Head w/ Stainless Steel Plate 1 TYPE NUMBER 8 Circuit Breaker Assembly 2 SERIES PC 3 ACTUATOR TYPE 1 Handle, one per pole 2 Handle, one per multipole unit ARocker 2 4 POLES PER UNIT - INCLUDING ELECTRONIC MODULE 3Three 4Four 5Five Notes: 1 Screws supplied to accommodate mounting panel thickness of 1/8” ± 1/32”. Consult Factory for additional options 2 Available for Flat and Curved Rocker options - No Rockerguard Bracket Handle Style Panel Seal Rocker Style Panel Seal 170 www.carlingtech.com PC-Series Circuit Breaker - Panel Seal Configuration - Dimensional Specifications Handle Actuator Rocker Actuator www.carlingtech.com 171 PC-Series Circuit Breaker - Time Delay Curves Time Delay Curves Instantaneous Medium Ultra Short Long Short Time Delay Values Percent of Rated Current Delay 100% 125% 150% 200% 400% 600% 800% 1000% 1200% 20 21 22 24 26 No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip May Trip .014 - .150 .700 - 12.0 10.0 - 160 50.0 - 700 .040 MAX .011 - .095 .350 - 4.00 6.00 - 60.0 32.0 - 350 .035 MAX .008 - .055 .130 - 1.30 2.20 - 20.0 10.0 - 90.0 .030 MAX .006 - .035 .027 - .220 .300 - 3.00 1.50 - 15.0 .025 MAX .005 - .027 .008 - .130 .050 - 1.30 .500 - 7.00 .020 MAX .005 - .021 .004 - .090 .007 - .500 .020 - 3.00 .017 MAX .004 - .018 .004 - .045 .005 - .060 .006 - 2.00 .015 MAX .004 - .017 .004 - .040 .005 - .040 .005 - 1.00 Notes: Other time delay values available, consult factory. Delay Curves 21,22,24,26: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 125% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. Delay Curve 20: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 150% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. All Curves: Curve data shown represents breaker response at ambient temperature of 77°F (25°C) with no preloading. Breakers are mounted in standard wall-mount position. The minimum inrush pulse tolerance handling capability is 12 times the rated current. These values are based on a 60 Hz 1/2 cycle, 8.33 ms pulse. 172 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 173 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 174 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 175 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 176 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 177 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 178 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 179 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 180 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 181 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 182 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 183 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 184 www.carlingtech.com Carling Technologies Catalogs There are several catalogs available featuring complete details on all Carling Technologies products. Below is a list of useful information such as catalogs, brochures and videos. Please visit our website at carlingtech.com or scan the QR codes below for complete details. www.carlingtech.com Watch Company Profile Video Switches & Controls Hydraulic-Magnetic SWITCHES & CONTROLS Rocker, Toggle, Pushbutton & Rotary CATALOG Circuit Protection CATALOG catalog catalog Complete line and ordering details for Switches & Control products including Rocker, Toggle, Pushbutton, and Rotary style switches. Complete line and ordering details for all hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers. Thermal GFCI / ELCI GFCI / ELCI THERMAL Circuit Protection Circuit Protection CATALOG catalog Complete line and ordering details for all thermal circuit breakers. www.carlingtech.com CATALOG catalog Complete line and ordering details for all GFCIs/ELCIs. 185 Carling Technologies Catalogs Marine On-Off Highway MARINE ON/OFF HIGHWAY Switches, Circuit Protection & ELCI/GFCIs Switches & Controls catalog brochure catalog brochure Complete line of ELCIs, thermal and hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers specific for marine applications. Complete line of switches, controls and custom solutions specific for on-off highway applications. Renewable Energy Military MILITARY RENEWABLE ENERGY Circuit Breakers & Disconnects COTS Switches & Circuit Breakers catalog brochure catalog brochure Complete line of circuit breakers and disconnect products specific for renewable energy applications. Complete line of COTS (Commercial-Off-The-Shelf) switches and circuit breakers specific for military applications. Telecom/Datacom Industrial Automation TELECOM/DATACOM INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION AND CONTROLS Circuit Protection Circuit Protection & Switches catalog brochure Complete line of hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers specific for telecom/datacom applications. 186 brochure Complete line of switches and circuit breakers specific for industrial automation & controls applications. www.carlingtech.com Reps & Contact Authorized Sales Representatives Click on the group name on the map below to find your local representative or visit www.carlingtech.com/findarep. « « Matera W. Canada Matera E. Canada MIDWEST DM Michigan TEMCO Northwest Alaska, Hawaii « NORTHERN Hanna Lind Ltd. Melody Emery Sierra Bridge Marketing Omega Limited Dy-tronix Inc. LD. Allen Norris DM Assoc East Pacent DM Assoc TSI North TSI WEST Signal Enterprises Luscombe Engineering Pinnacle Marketing Matrix DM Mexico South America Mexico « « Sunbelt Components SOUTHEAST ProRep Solutions LATIN AMERICA Americas Europe Middle East Africa Asia-Pacific Oceania About Carling Founded in 1920, Carling Technologies is a leading manufacturer of electrical and electronic switches and assemblies, circuit breakers, electronic controls, power distribution units, and multiplexed power distribution systems. With four ISO registered manufacturing facilities and technical sales offices worldwide, Carling Technologies Sales, Service and Engineering teams do much more than manufacture electrical components, they engineer powerful solutions! To learn more about Carling please visit www.carlingtech.com/company-profile. To view all of Carling’s environmental, quality, health & safety certifications please visit www.carlingtech.com/environmental-certifications www.carlingtech.com 187 Worlwide Headquarters Asia-Pacific Headquarters 60 Johnson Avenue, Plainville, CT 06062 Tel: (860) 793-9281 Fax: (860) 793-9231 Email: [email protected] Web: www.carlingtech.com Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: Int + 852-2737-2277 Fax: Int + 852-2736-9332 Email: [email protected] Carling Technologies, Inc. Northern Region Sales Office Carling Technologies, Asia-Pacific Ltd. Shenzhen, China [email protected] Europe/Middle East/ Africa Headquarters Carling Technologies Ltd. 4 Airport Business Park, Exeter Airport, Clyst Honiton, Exeter, Devon, EX5 2UL, UK Tel: Int + 44 1392-364422 Fax: Int + 44 1392-364477 Email: [email protected] [email protected] Shanghai, China [email protected] Pune, India Germany [email protected] Kaohsiung, Taiwan France [email protected] Yokohama, Japan Southeast Region Sales Office Midwest Region Sales Office West Region Sales Office Latin America Sales Office [email protected] MARINE-C_04_2016 [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected]